WO2005063247A1 - Aryl sulfonamide compounds and uses related thereto - Google Patents

Aryl sulfonamide compounds and uses related thereto Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2005063247A1
WO2005063247A1 PCT/US2004/042842 US2004042842W WO2005063247A1 WO 2005063247 A1 WO2005063247 A1 WO 2005063247A1 US 2004042842 W US2004042842 W US 2004042842W WO 2005063247 A1 WO2005063247 A1 WO 2005063247A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
compound
aryl
heteroaryl
disorder
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2004/042842
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Michael R. Degraffenreid
Xiao He
Jay P. Powers
Daquing Sun
Xuelei Yan
Original Assignee
Amgen Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Amgen Inc. filed Critical Amgen Inc.
Priority to CA002548309A priority Critical patent/CA2548309A1/en
Priority to JP2006547244A priority patent/JP2007515490A/en
Priority to AU2004308932A priority patent/AU2004308932A1/en
Priority to EP04814971A priority patent/EP1703908A4/en
Publication of WO2005063247A1 publication Critical patent/WO2005063247A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/36—Radicals substituted by singly-bound nitrogen atoms
    • C07D213/38—Radicals substituted by singly-bound nitrogen atoms having only hydrogen or hydrocarbon radicals attached to the substituent nitrogen atom
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00—Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06—Antipsoriatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24—Antidepressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/06—Antiglaucoma agents or miotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/06—Antihyperlipidemics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/12—Antihypertensives
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/61—Halogen atoms or nitro radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/78—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms, with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C07D213/81—Amides; Imides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D233/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D233/54—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, not condensed with other rings having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D241/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings
    • C07D241/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D241/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D295/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms
    • C07D295/22—Heterocyclic compounds containing polymethylene-imine rings with at least five ring members, 3-azabicyclo [3.2.2] nonane, piperazine, morpholine or thiomorpholine rings, having only hydrogen atoms directly attached to the ring carbon atoms with hetero atoms directly attached to ring nitrogen atoms
    • C07D295/26—Sulfur atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms

Definitions

  • This invention is generally directed to novel compounds, compositions, and the use of either in methods for modulating hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, such as 11/3-HSD1, and for treating or preventing diseases associated with the modulation of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, such as diabetes and obesity.
  • the methods comprise the administration, to a patient in need thereof, of a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • Novel Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, stereoisomers, or prodrugs thereof are presented herein.
  • HSDs Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases
  • the 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (11 ⁇ -HSDs) catalyze the interconversion of active glucocorticoids (such as cortisol and corticosterone), and their inert forms (such as cortisone and 11- dehydrocorticosterone).
  • the isoform 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 (11/3- HSD1) is expressed in liver, adipose tissue, brain, lung and other glucocorticoid tissue and is a potential target for therapy directed at numerous disorders that may be ameliorated by reduction of glucocorticoid action, such as diabetes, obesity and age-related cognitive dysfunction. Seckl, et al., Endocrinology, 2001, 142:1371-1376.
  • HSDs are also believed to play a role in obesity.
  • Obesity is an important factor in Syndrome X as well as type II (non-insulin dependent) diabetes, and omental fat appears to be of central importance in the development of both of these disease, as abdominal obesity has been linked with glucose intolerance, hyperinsulinemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and other factors of Syndrome X (e.g., raised blood pressure, decreased levels of HDL and increased levels of VLDL).
  • stromal cells pre-adipocytes
  • resultsed in a decreased rate of differentiation into adipocytes This is predicted to result in diminished expansion (possibly reduction) ofthe omental fat depot, which may lead to reduced central obesity. Bujalska et al., Lancet 1997, 349:1210-1213.
  • HSDs have also been implicated in the process of appetite control and therefore is believed to play an additional role in weight-related disorders. It is known that adrenalectomy attenuates the effect of fasting to increase both food intake and hypothalamic neuropeptide Y expression. This suggests that glucocorticoids play a role in promoting food intake and that inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 in the brain may increase satiety, thus resulting in a decreased food intake. Woods et al., Sct ' ercce 1998, 280:1378-1383.
  • Another possible therapeutic effect associated with modulation of HSDs is that which is related to various pancreatic aliments. It is reported that inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 in murine pancreatic /3-cells results in increased insulin secretion. Davani et al., J. Biol. Chem. 2000, 275:34841-34844. This follows from the preceding discovery that glucocorticoids were previously found to be responsible for reduced pancreatic insulin release in vivo Billaudel et al., Horm. Metab. Res. 1979, 11:555-560. Thus, it is suggested that inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 would yield other beneficial effects in the treatment of diabetes other than the predicted effects on the liver and of fat reduction.
  • 11 / 3-HSD1 also regulates glucocorticoid activity in the brain and thus contributes to neurotoxicity.
  • Stress and/or glucocorticoids are known to influence cognitive function (de Quervain et al, Nature 1998, 394:787-790), and unpublished results indicate significant memory improvement in rats treated with a non-specific 11/3-HSD inhibitors.
  • 11/3-HSD1 reactivates 11-DHC to corticosterone in hippocampal cells and can potentiate kinase neurotoxicity, resulting in age- related learning impairments. Therefore, selective inhibitors of 1 l -HSDl are believed to protect against hippocampal function decline with age. Yau et al., Proc Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 2001, 98:4716-4721. Thus, it has been hypothesized that inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 in the human brain would protect against deleterious glucocorticoid-mediated effects on neuronal function, such as cognitive impairment, depression, and increased appetite.
  • HSDs are believed to play a role in immunomodulation based on the general perception that glucocorticoids suppress the immune system.
  • HPA hypothalamopituitary- adrenal
  • glucocorticoids help balance between cell-mediated responses and humoral responses.
  • Increased glucocorticoid activity which may be induced by stress, is associated with a humoral response and as such, the inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 may result in shifting the response towards a cell-based reaction.
  • 11 / 3-HSD1 is expressed exclusively in the basal cells ofthe corneal epithelium, the non-pigmented epithelialium ofthe cornea (the site of aqueous production), ciliary muscle, and the sphincter and dilator muscles ofthe iris.
  • the distant isoenzyme 1 l -hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 2 (“11/3-HSD2") is highly expressed in the non-pigmented ciliary epithelium and corneal endothelium.
  • No HSDs have been found at the trabecular meshwork, which is the site of drainage. Therefore, 1 l -HSDl is suggested to have a role in aqueous production.
  • Glucocorticoids also play an essential role in skeletal development and function but are detrimental to such development and function when present in excess.
  • Glucocorticoid- induced bone loss is partially derived from suppression of osteoblast proliferation and collagen synthesis, as reported in Kim et al., J. Endocrinol. 1999, 162:371 379. It has been reported that the detrimental effects of glucocorticoids on bone nodule formation can be lessened by adminisfration of carbenoxolone, which is a non-specific 11 / 3-HSDl inhibitor. Bellows et al., Bone 1998, 23:119-125.
  • 11/3-HSD1 maybe responsible for providing increased levels of active glucocorticoid in osteoclasts, and thus in augmenting bone resorption.
  • Cooper et al. Bone 2000, 27:375-381.
  • This data suggests that inhibition of 11/3-HSDl may have beneficial effects against osteoporosis via one or more mechanisms which may act in parallel.
  • the various isozymes ofthe 17-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (17/3-HSDs) bind to androgen receptors or estrogen receptors and catalyze the interconversion of various sex hormones including esfradiol/estrone and testosterone/androstenedione.
  • six isozymes have been identifed in humans and are expressed in various human tissues including endometrial tissue, breast tissue, colon tissue, and in the testes.
  • 17-beta- hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 2 (17/3-HSD2) is expressed in human endometrium and it's activity has been reported to be linked to cervical cancer. Kitawaki et al., J Clin. Endocrin.
  • 17-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 3 (17/3-HSD3) is expressed in the testes and it's modulation may be useful for the freatment of androgen-related disorders.
  • Androgens and estrogens are active in their 17/3-hydroxy configurations, whereas their 17-keto derivatives do not bind to androgen and estrogen receptors and are thus inactive.
  • the conversion between the active and inactive forms (esfradiol/estrone and testosterone/androstenedione) of sex hormones is catlyzed by members ofthe 17/3-HSD family.
  • 17/3-HSD 1 catalyzes the formation of estradiol in breast tissue, which is important for the growth of malignant breast tumors. Labrie et al., Mol. Cell. Endocrinol. 1991, 78:C113- CI 18.
  • a similar role has been suggested for 17/3-HSD4 in colon cancer. English et al., J.
  • 17/3-HSD3 is almost exclusively expressed in the testes and converts androstenedione into testosterone. Deficiency of this enzyme during fetal develoment leads to male pseudohermaphroditism. Geissler et al., Nat. Genet. 1994, 7:34-39. Both 17/3-HSD3 and various 3 ⁇ -HSD isozymes are involved in complex metabolic pathways which lead to androgen shuffles between inactive and active forms. Penning et al., Biochem. J. 2000, 351:67-77. Thus, modulation of certain HSDs can have potentially beneficial effects in the freatment of androgen- and estrogen-related disorders.
  • the 20-alpha-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (20 ⁇ -HSDs) catalyze the interconversion of progestins (such as between progesterone and 20 ⁇ -hydroxy progesterone).
  • Other substrates for 20 ⁇ -HSDs include 17o;-hydroxypregnenolone or 17 ⁇ - hydroxyprogesterone, leading to 20 ⁇ -OH steroids.
  • 20o!-HSD isoforms have been identified and 20 ⁇ -HSDs are expressed in various tissues, including the placenta, ovaries, testes and adrenals. Peltoketo, et al., J. Mol. Endocrinol. 1999, 23:1-11.
  • the 3-alpha-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases catalyze the interconversion ofthe androgens dihydrotestosterone (DHT) and 5 ⁇ -androstane-3o 17/3-diol and the interconversion ofthe androgens DHEA and androstenedione and therefore play an important role in androgen metabolism.
  • DHT dihydrotestosterone
  • DHEA dihydrotestosterone
  • DHEA androstenedione and therefore play an important role in androgen metabolism.
  • Aryl sulfonamide compounds and methods for their synthesis are disclosed in Klioze et al., J. Med. Chem. 1980, 23:677-679, and International Publication No. WO 01/02371. The disclosure of these publications, however, does not however encompass the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe present invention nor the use ofthe disclosed compounds as HSD modulators.
  • the present invention relates to novel compounds, compositions thereof and methods for modulating the activity of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (HSDs), such as 11/3- hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, 17/3-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, 20 ⁇ -hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, and 3 ⁇ -hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, including all isoforms thereof, including but not limted to 11/3-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 (hereinafter "11 / 3- HSDl”), 11/3-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 2 (hereinafter "11/3-HSD2”), and 17/3- hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 3 (hereinafter "17/3-HSD3").
  • HSDs hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases
  • the components ofthe invention inhibit HSD activity.
  • the present invention also relates to methods for treating or preventing diseases or disorders associated with the action of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, stereoisomer, or prodrug thereof.
  • the invention encompasses both selective and non-selective inhibitors of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases.
  • selective and non-selective inhibitors of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases each have benefits in the treatment or prevention of diseases associated with, for example, abnormal glucose levels or hypothalamic function.
  • Two types of selectivity are contemplated, that with respect to selectivity for HSDs as a class over other types of receptors or gene targets related to glucose metabolism, or those which are selective for various HSDs or specific isoforms thereof compared to other HSDs or specific isoforms thereof.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can act as selective or non- selective 11/3-HSD inhibitors.
  • the compounds may inhibit the interconversion of inactive 11-keto steroids with their active hydroxy equivalents.
  • the present invention provides methods by which the conversion ofthe inactive form to the active form may be controlled, and useful therapeutic effects maybe obtained as a result of such control. More specifically, but not exclusively, the invention is concerned with interconversion between cortisone and cortisol in humans.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can act as 11/3-HSD inhibitors in vivo.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe present invention may be orally active.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds are also useful for modulation of numerous metabolic functions including, but not limited to, one or more of: (i) regulation of carbohydrate metabolism, (ii) regulation of protein metabolism, (iii) regulation of lipid metabolism, (iv) regulation of normal growth and/or development, (v) influence on cognitive function, (vi) resistance to stress and mineralocorticoid activity.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds may also be useful for inhibiting hepatic gluconeogenesis, and may also be effective to relieve the effects of endogenous glucocorticoids in diabetes mellitus, obesity (including entripetal obesity), neuronal loss and/or the cognitive impairment of old age.
  • the invention provides the use of an inhibitor of HSDs in methods directed to producing one or more therapeutic effects in a patient to whom the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound is administered, said therapeutic effects selected from inhibition of hepatic gluconeogenesis, an increase in insulin sensitivity in adipose tissue and muscle, and the prevention of or reduction in neuronal loss/cognitive impairment due to glucocorticoid-potentiated neurotoxicity or neural dysfunction or damage.
  • the invention further provides methods for treating treatment a condition selected from the group consisting of: hepatic insulin resistance, adipose tissue insulin resistance, muscle insulin resistance, neuronal loss or dysfunction due to glucocorticoid potentiated neurotoxicity, and any combination ofthe aforementioned conditions, the methods comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe invention include compounds having Formula (I): (I) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, stereoisomers, or prodrugs thereof, wherein R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are independently selected from -H, -halo, -OH, -CN, -NO 2 , -d-C 8 alkyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, - heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl and -aryl, and at least one of R 1 , R 2 and R 3 is other than -H; R 4 is selected from -H, -halo, -CN, -NO 2 , - -Cs alkyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, -C 2 -C 8 alky
  • R 5 is selected from -H, -halo, -CN, -NO 2 , -d-C 8 alkyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl,
  • R 6 is selected from -H, -halo, -CN, -NO 2 , -C ⁇ -C 8 alkyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl,
  • R 7 is selected from -H, -halo, -CN, -N0 2 , amino and -d-Cs alkyl; and in some embodiments is in a position ortho to the sulfonamide moiety of formula I;
  • Q is selected from the group consisting of -H, -halo, -CN, -NO , -Q-Cs alkyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, - heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl),
  • R a is selected from 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-chlorophenyl and 4-bromophenyl and R b is 4-fluorophenyl or 4-bromophenyl.
  • the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, carrier, excipient or diluent.
  • the invention provides methods for freating insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus comprising admimstering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for freating non-insulin- dependent diabetes mellitus comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for treating insulin resistance comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for freating obesity comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for modulating cortisol production comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for modulating hepatic glucose production comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for modulating hypothalamic function comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for freating a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase-mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides method for modulating the function of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase in a cell comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for modulating a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase, comprising admimstering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for treating an 11 /3-HSD 1 - mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides method for modulating the function of 11/3-HSDl in a cell comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for modulating 11 /3-HSD 1 , comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for freating an 1 l/3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I)..
  • the invention provides method for modulating the function of 11/3-HSD2 in a cell comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for modulating 11/3-HSD2, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for treating an 17/3-HSD3 -mediated condition or disorder comprising admimstering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides method for modulating the function of 17/3-HSD3 in a cell comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention provides methods for modulating 17/3-HSD3, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • d-C 6 alkyl refers to a straight or branched chain, saturated hydrocarbon having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Representative d-C 6 alkyl groups include, but are not limited to methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, and neohexyl.
  • a -C ⁇ alkyl group can be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein below.
  • d-C 8 alkyl refers to a straight or branched chain, saturated hydrocarbon having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • Representative d-C 8 alkyl groups include, but are not limited to methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, neohexyl, heptyl, isoheptyl, neoheptyl, octyl, isooctyl, and neooctyl.
  • a d-C 8 alkyl group can be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein below.
  • C 2 -C 8 alkenyl refers to a straight or branched chain unsaturated hydrocarbon containing 2-8 carbon atoms and at least one double bond.
  • Examples of a C 2 -C 8 alkenyl group include, but are not limited to, ethylene, propylene, 1- butylene, 2-butylene, isobutylene, sec-butylene, 1-pentene, 2-pentene, isopentene, 1-hexene, 2-hexene, 3-hexene, isohexene, 1-heptene, 2-heptene, 3-heptene, isoheptene, 1-octene, 2- octene, 3-octene, 4-octene, and isooctene.
  • C 2 -C 8 alkynyl refers to a straight or branched chain unsaturated hydrocarbon containing 2-8 carbon atoms and at least one triple bond.
  • Examples of a C 2 -C 8 alkynyl group include, but are not limited to, acetylene, propyne, 1-butyne, 2- butyne, isobutyne, sec-butyne, 1-pentyne, 2-pentyne, isopentyne, 1-hexyne, 2-hexyne, 3- hexyne, isohexyne, 1-heptyne, 2-heptyne, 3-heptyne, isoheptyne, 1-octyne, 2-octyne, 3- octyne, 4-octyne, and isooctyne.
  • d-C alkylene refers to a d-C 7 alkyl group in which one of the d-C 7 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a bond.
  • a d- C 7 alkylene include -CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -, and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -.
  • d-C 6 alkoxy refers to a group having the formula -O- (d-C 6 alkyl).
  • a d-C 6 alkoxy group include -O-methyl, -O-ethyl, -O-propyl, -O- isopropyl, -O-butyl, -O-sec-butyl, -O-tert-butyl, -O-pentyl, -O-isopentyl, -O-neopentyl, -O- hexyl, -O-isohexyl, and -O-neohexyl.
  • aminoalkyl refers to a d-C 6 alkyl group wherein from one or more ofthe d-C 6 alkyl group's hydrogen atom is replaced with an amine of formula -N(Ra)2, wherein each occurrence of Ra is independently -H or d-C 6 alkyl.
  • aminoalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 NH , -CH CH NH , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH NH , t-butylamine and isopropylamine.
  • aryl refers to a 6- to 14-membered monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic aromatic hydrocarbon ring system.
  • Examples of an aryl group include phenyl and naphthyl.
  • An aryl group can be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein below.
  • cycloalkyl and “cycloalkane” are used interchangeably and refer to a 3- to 15-membered saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring system. Included in this class are cycloalkyl groups which are fused to a benzene ring and cycloalkyl groups which are spirocyclic, as well as spirocyclic and fused to a benzene ring.
  • Representative cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, 1,3-cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptyl, cycloheptenyl, 1,3-cycloheptadienyl, 1,4- cycloheptadienyl, -1,3,5-cycloheptatrienyl, cyclooctyl, cyclooctenyl, 1,3-cyclooctadienyl, 1,4-cyclooctadienyl, -1,3,5-cyclooctatrienyl, decahydronaphthalene, octahydronaphthalene, hexahydronaphthalene, octahydroinden
  • halo refers to -F, -CI, -Br or -I.
  • haloalkyl refers to a d-C 6 alkyl group wherein from one or more ofthe d-C 6 alkyl group's hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen atom, which can be the same or different.
  • haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 4-chlorobutyl, 3-bromopropyl, pentachloroethyl, and 10 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-bromo-2-chloroethyl.
  • heteroalkyl by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combinations thereof, consisting ofthe stated number of carbon atoms and from one to three heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, N, Si and S, wherein the nitrogen and
  • [ 5 sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized.
  • the heteroatom(s) O, N and S may be placed at any interior position ofthe heteroalkyl group.
  • the heteroatom Si may be placed at any position ofthe heteroalkyl group, including the position at which the alkyl group is attached to the remainder ofthe molecule. Examples include -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 3 , -CH 2 -CH 2 -NH-CH 3 , -CH 2 -CH 2 -N(CH 3 )-CH 3 , -CH 2 -S-
  • d-C 7 heteroalkylene refers to a d-C alkylene in which one to three ofthe C 1 -C alkylene's -CH 2 - groups has been replaced by a sulfur atom, an 5 oxygen atom, or -NH-.
  • a C ⁇ -C 7 heteroalkylene group can have a heteroatom at either or both of its termini.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic heterocycle ring of 5 to 14 members and having at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, and containing at least 1 carbon atom, including monocyclic, bicyclic, and tricyclic ring 0 systems.
  • heteroaryls are triazolyl, tefrazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyridyl, furyl, benzofuranyl, thiophenyl, benzothiophenyl, quinolinyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, thiazolyl, benzothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, pyrimidyl, oxetanyl, azepinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dioxanyl, thietanyl and oxazolyl.
  • a heteroaryl group can be unsub
  • heteroatom is meant to include oxygen (O), nifrogen (N), and sulfur (S).
  • heterocycle refers to 5- to 14-membered ring systems which are either saturated, unsaturated, or aromatic, and which contains from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from nifrogen, oxygen and sulfur, and wherein the nifrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may be optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen heteroatom may be optionally quaternized, including, including monocyclic, bicyclic, and tricyclic ring systems.
  • the bicyclic and tricyclic ring systems may encompass a heterocycle or heteroaryl fused to a benzene ring.
  • the heterocycle may be attached via any heteroatom or carbon atom.
  • Heterocycles include heteroaryls as defined above.
  • heterocycles include, but are not limited to, aziridinyl, oxiranyl, thiiranyl, friazolyl, tefrazolyl, azirinyl, diaziridinyl, diazirinyl, oxaziridinyl, azetidinyl, azetidinonyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, pyrrolyl, oxazinyl, thiazinyl, diazinyl, triazinyl, tetrazinyl, imidazolyl, tefrazolyl, pyrrolidinyl, isoxazolyl, furanyl, furazanyl, pyridinyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, thiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, azir
  • hydroxyalkyl refers to a C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl group wherein from one or more ofthe C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl group's hydrogen atom is replaced with an -OH group.
  • hydroxyalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 OH, -CH 2 CH 2 OH, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH, CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH, t-butanol and isopropanol.
  • C 3 -C 8 hydroxyalkyl refers to a hydroxyalkyl group having from three to eight carbon atoms.
  • R', R" and R'" each independently refer to hydrogen, unsubstituted (d-C 8 )alkyl or (d-C 8 )alkyl substituted with hydroxy, cyano or amino, unsubstituted hetero(C 1 -C 8 )alkyl, unsubstituted aryl and aryl substituted with one to three substituents selected from -halo, unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkoxy, unsubstituted thioalkoxy and unsubstituted aryl(d-C 4 )alkyl.
  • R' and R" When R' and R" are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nifrogen atom to form a 5-, 6- or 7- membered ring.
  • -NR'R is meant to include 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl.
  • an alkyl or heteroalkyl group will have from zero to three substituents, with those groups having two or fewer substituents being preferred in the present invention. More preferably, an alkyl or heteroalkyl radical will be unsubstituted or monosubstituted. Most preferably, an alkyl or heteroalkyl radical will be unsubstituted. From the above discussion of substituents, one of skill in the art will understand that the term "alkyl” is meant to include groups such as trihaloalkyl (e.g., -CF and -CH 2 CF 3 ).
  • Preferred substituents for the alkyl and heteroalkyl radicals are selected from: -OR', -NR'R", -SR', -halo, -SiR'R"R'", -OC(O)R', -C(0)R', -CO 2 R', -C(O)NR'R",
  • substituents are selected from: -OR', -NR'R", -halo, -OC(O)R', -CO 2 R', -C(O)NR'R", -OC(O)NR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -NR"CO 2 R', -NR'"SO 2 NR'R", -SO 2 R', -SO 2 NR'R", -NR"SO 2 R' -CN and -NO 2 .
  • an aryl or heteroaryl group will have from zero to three substituents, with those groups having two or fewer substituents being preferred in the present invention.
  • an aryl or heteroaryl group will be unsubstituted or monosubstituted.
  • an aryl or heteroaryl group will be unsubstituted.
  • Preferred substituents for aryl and heteroaryl groups are selected from: -halo, -OR', -OC(O)R', -NR'R", -SR', -R', -CN, -N0 2 , -CO 2 R', -CONR'R", -C(O)R', -OC(0)NR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -S(O)R', -SO 2 R', -SO 2 NR'R", -NR"SO 2 R', -N 3 , -CH(Ph) 2 , perfluoroalkoxy and perfluoro(d-C 4 )alkyl, where R' and R" are as defined above.
  • substituents are selected from: -halo, -OR', -OC(0)R', -NR'R", -R', -CN, -NO 2 , -CO 2 R', -CONR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -SO 2 R', -SO 2 NR'R", -NR"SO 2 R', perfluoroalkoxy and perfluoro(d-C 4 )alkyl.
  • Two ofthe substituents on adjacent atoms ofthe aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula -T-C(O)-(CH 2 ) q -U-, wherein T and U are independently -NH-, -O-, -CH 2 - or a single bond, and q is an integer of from 0 to 2.
  • two ofthe substituents on adjacent atoms ofthe aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent ofthe formula -A-(CH 2 ) r -B-, wherein A and B are independently -CH 2 -, -O-, -NH-, -S-, -S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, -S(O) 2 NR'- or a single bond, and r is an integer of from 1 to 3.
  • One ofthe single bonds ofthe new ring so formed may optionally be replaced with a double bond.
  • two ofthe substituents on adjacent atoms ofthe aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent ofthe formula -(CH 2 ) S - X-(CH )r, where s and t are independently integers of from 0 to 3, and X is -O-, -NR'-, -S-, - S(O)-, -S(O) 2 -, or -S(O) 2 NR'-.
  • the substituent R' in -NR'- and -S(O) 2 NR'- is selected from hydrogen or unsubstituted (d-C 6 )alkyl.
  • substituent -CO 2 H may be optionally replaced with bioisosteric replacements such as: 0 II P ⁇ OH , % OH and the like. See, e.g., The Practice of Medicinal Chemistry; Wermuth, C.G., Ed.; Academic Press: New York, 1996; p. 203.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can also exist in various isomeric forms, including configurational, geometric and conformational isomers, as well as existing in various tautomeric forms, particularly those that differ in the point of attachment of a hydrogen atom.
  • the term "isomer" is intended to encompass all isomeric forms of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, including tautomeric forms ofthe compound.
  • Certain Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds may have asymmetric centers and therefore exist in different enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms.
  • An Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be in the form of an optical isomer or a diastereomer. Accordingly, the invention encompasses Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds and their uses as described herein in the form of their optical isomers, diasteriomers and mixtures thereof, including a racemic mixture.
  • Optical isomers ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can be obtained by known techniques such as asymmetric synthesis, chiral chromatography, simulated moving bed technology or via chemical separation of stereoisomers through the employment of optically active resolving agents.
  • stereomerically pure compound means one stereoisomer of a compound that is substantially free of other stereoisomers of that compound.
  • a stereomerically pure compound having one chiral center will be substantially free ofthe opposite enantiomer ofthe compound.
  • a stereomerically pure a compound having two chiral centers will be substantially free of other diastereomers ofthe compound.
  • a typical stereomerically pure compound comprises greater than about 80% by weight of one stereoisomer ofthe compound and less than about 20% by weight of other stereoisomers ofthe compound, more preferably greater than about 90% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 10% by weight of the other stereoisomers ofthe compound, even more preferably greater than about 95% by weight of one stereoisomer ofthe compound and less than about 5% by weight ofthe other stereoisomers ofthe compound, and most preferably greater than about 97% by weight of one stereoisomer ofthe compound and less than about 3% by weight ofthe other stereoisomers of the compound.
  • An Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt refers to a pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic acid or base salt of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • Representative pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, e.g., alkali metal salts, alkali earth salts, ammonium salts, water- soluble and water-insoluble salts, such as the acetate, amsonate (4,4-diaminostilbene-2, 2 - disulfonate), benzenesulfonate, benzonate, bicarbonate, bisulfate, bitarfrate, borate, bromide, butyrate, calcium, calcium edetate, camsylate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, clavulariate, dihydrochloride, edetate, edisylate, estolate, esylate, fiunarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycollylarsanilate, hexafluorophosphate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, is
  • the term "isolated and purified form” means that when isolated (e.g., from other components of a synthetic organic chemical reaction mixture), the isolate contains at least 30%, at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95% or at least 98% of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound by weight of the isolate. In one embodiment, the isolate contains at least 95% of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound by weight ofthe isolate.
  • prodrug means a derivative of a compound that can hydrolyze, oxidize, or otherwise react under biological conditions (in vitro or in vivo) to provide an active compound, particularly an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • prodrugs include, but are not limited to, derivatives and metabolites of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound that include biohydrolyzable groups such as biohydrolyzable amides, biohydrolyzable esters, biohydrolyzable carbamates, biohydrolyzable carbonates, biohydrolyzable ureides, and biohydrolyzable phosphate analogues (e.g., monophosphate, diphosphate or triphosphate).
  • biohydrolyzable groups such as biohydrolyzable amides, biohydrolyzable esters, biohydrolyzable carbamates, biohydrolyzable carbonates, biohydrolyzable ureides, and biohydrolyzable phosphate analogues (e.g.
  • prodrugs of compounds with carboxyl functional groups are the lower alkyl esters ofthe carboxylic acid.
  • the carboxylate esters are conveniently formed by esterifying any ofthe carboxylic acid moieties present on the molecule.
  • Prodrugs can typically be prepared using well-known methods, such as those described by Burger 's Medicinal Chemistry and Drug Discovery 6 ed. (Donald J. Abraham ed., 2001, Wiley) and Design and Application of Prodrugs (H. Bundgaard ed., 1985, Harwood Academic Publishers Gmfh).
  • the terms “treat”, “treating” and “treatment” refer to the eradication or amelioration of a disease or symptoms associated with a disease. In certain embodiments, such terms refer to minimizing the spread or worsening ofthe disease resulting from the administration of one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents to a patient with such a disease.
  • the terms “prevent”, “preventing” and “prevention” refer to the prevention ofthe onset, recurrence or spread ofthe disease in a patient resulting from the adminisfration of a prophylactic or therapeutic agent.
  • an effective amount refers to an amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound or other active ingredient sufficient to provide a therapeutic or prophylactic benefit in the freatment or prevention of a disease or to delay or minimize symptoms associated with a disease.
  • a therapeutically effective amount with respect to an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound means that amount of therapeutic agent alone, or in combination with other therapies, that provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or prevention of a disease. Used in connection with an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, the term can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids symptoms or causes of disease, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of or synergies with another therapeutic agent,
  • Syndrome X refers to a collection of abnormalities including hyperinsulinemia, obesity, elevated levels of triglycerides, uric acid, fibrinogen, small dense LDL particles and plasminogen activator inhibitor 1 (PAI-1), and decreased levels of HDL cholesterol. Syndrome X is further meant to include metabolic syndrome.
  • modulate refers to the ability of a compound to increase or decrease the function, or activity of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase, for example, 11 (3-HSD 1.
  • Module as used herein in its various forms, is intended to encompass inhibition, antagonism, partial antagonism, activation, agonism and/or partial agonism ofthe activity associated with a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase.
  • Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors are compounds that, e.g., bind to, partially or totally block stimulation, decrease, prevent, delay activation, inactivate, desensitize, or down regulate signal transduction.
  • Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase activators are compounds that, e.g., bind to, stimulate, increase, open, activate, facilitate, enhance activation, sensitize or up regulate signal transduction.
  • the ability of a compound to modulate a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase can be demonstrated in an enzymatic assay or a cell-based assay.
  • the inhibition of 11/3-HSDl may decrease cortisol levels in a patient and/or increase cortisone levels in a patient by blocking the conversion of cortisone to cortisol.
  • the inhibition of 11/3-HSD2 can increase cortisol levels in a patient and/or decrease cortisone levels in a patient by blocking the conversion of cortisol to cortisone.
  • a "patient” includes an animal (e.g., cow, horse, sheep, pig, chicken, turkey, quail, cat, dog, mouse, rat, rabbit or guinea pig), in one embodiment a mammal such as a non- primate and a primate (e.g., monkey and human), and in another embodiment a human.
  • a patient is a human.
  • the patient is a human infant, child, adolescent or adult.
  • HSD hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase enzymes in general, including, but not limited to, 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (1 l ⁇ -HSDs), 17-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (17 ⁇ -HSDs), 20-alpha-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (20 ⁇ -HSDs), 3-alpha-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (3 ⁇ -HSDs), and all isoforms thereof.
  • 11/3-HSDl refers to the 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 enzyme, variant, or isoform thereof.
  • 11/3-HSDl variants include proteins substantially homologous to native 11/3-HSDl, i.e., proteins having one or more naturally or non-naturally occurring amino acid deletions, insertions or substitutions (e.g., 11/3-HSDl derivatives, homologs and fragments).
  • the amino acid sequence of a 11/3-HSDl variant preferably is at least about 80% identical to a native 11/3-HSDl, more preferably at least about 90% identical, and most preferably at least about 95% identical.
  • 11 /3-HSD2 refers to the 11 -beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 2 enzyme, variant, or isoform thereof.
  • 11 3-HSD2 variants include proteins substantially homologous to native 11 / 3-HSD2, i.e., proteins having one or more naturally or non-naturally occurring amino acid deletions, insertions or substitutions (e.g., 11/3-HSD2 derivatives, homologs and fragments).
  • the amino acid sequence of a 11/3-HSD2 variant preferably is at least about 80% identical to a native 11/3-HSD2, more preferably at least about 90% identical, and most preferably at least about 95% identical, (see Bart et al, J. Med. Chem., 2002, 45:3813-3815).
  • 17/3-HSD3 refers to the 17-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 3 enzyme, variant, or isoform thereof.
  • 173-HSD3 variants include proteins substantially homologous to native 17/3-HSD3, i.e., proteins having one or more naturally or non-naturally occurring amino acid deletions, insertions or substitutions (e.g., 17/3-HSD3 derivatives, homologs and fragments).
  • the amino acid sequence of a 17/3-HSD3 variant preferably is at least about 80% identical to a native 17/3-HSD3, more preferably at least about 90% identical, and most preferably at least about 95% identical.
  • HSD-responsive condition or disorder refers to a condition or disorder that responds favorably to modulation of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase enzyme (HSD).
  • HSD hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase enzyme
  • Favorable responses to HSD modulation include alleviation or abrogation ofthe disease and/or its .attendant symptoms, inhibition of the disease, i.e., arrest or reduction ofthe development ofthe disease, or its clinical symptoms, and regression ofthe disease or its clinical symptoms.
  • An HSD-responsive condition or disease may be completely or partially responsive to HSD modulation.
  • HSD-responsive condition or disorder may be associated with inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, HSD activity and at least partially responsive to or affected by HSD modulation (e.g., an HSD inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients). Inappropriate HSD functional activity might arise as the result of HSD expression in cells which normally do not express HSD, decreased HSD expression or increased HSD expression.
  • An HSD-responsive condition or disorder may include condition or disorder mediated by any HSD or isoform thereof.
  • 11/3-HSDl -responsive condition or disorder refers to a condition or disorder that responds favorably to modulation of 11/3-HSDl activity.
  • Favorable responses to 11 / 3-HSDl modulation include alleviation or abrogation ofthe disease and/or its attendant symptoms, inhibition ofthe disease, i.e., arrest or reduction ofthe development ofthe disease, or its clinical symptoms, and regression ofthe disease or its clinical symptoms.
  • An 11/3-HSDl -responsive condition or disease maybe completely or partially responsive to 11 / 3-HSDl modulation.
  • An 11 / 3-HSDl -responsive condition or disorder may be associated with inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 11 / 3-HSDl activity and at least partially responsive to or affected by 11 / 3-HSDl modulation (e.g., a 11/3-HSDl inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
  • Inappropriate 11 / 3-HSDl functional activity might arise as the result of 11 / 3-HSDl expression in cells which normally do not express 11 / 3-HSDl, decreased 11/3- HSDl expression or increased 11/3-HSDl expression.
  • a 11 / 3-HSDl -responsive condition or disorder may include a 11 (3-HSD 1 -mediated condition or disorder.
  • 1 l/3-HSD2-responsive condition or disorder refers to a condition or disorder that responds favorably to modulation of 11/3-HSD2 activity.
  • Favorable responses to 11/3-HSD2 modulation include alleviation or abrogation ofthe disease and/or its attendant symptoms, inhibition ofthe disease, i.e., arrest or reduction ofthe development ofthe disease, or its clinical symptoms, and regression ofthe disease or its clinical symptoms.
  • An 1 l/3-HSD2-responsive condition or disease may be completely or partially responsive to 11/3-HSD2 modulation.
  • An 1 l/3-HSD2-responsive condition or disorder may be associated with inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 11 / 3-HSD2 activity and at least partially responsive to or affected by 11/3-HSD2 modulation (e.g., a 11/3-HSD2 inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
  • 17/3-HSD3 -responsive condition or disorder refers to a condition or disorder that responds favorably to modulation of 17/3-HSD3 activity.
  • Favorable responses to 17/3-HSD3 modulation include alleviation or abrogation ofthe disease and/or its attendant symptoms, inhibition ofthe disease, i.e., arrest or reduction ofthe development ofthe disease, or its clinical symptoms, and regression ofthe disease or its clinical symptoms.
  • An 17/3-HSD3-responsive condition or disease may be completely or partially responsive to 17/3-HSD3 modulation.
  • An 17/3-HSD3-responsive condition or disorder may be associated with inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 17/3-HSD3 activity and at least partially responsive to or affected by 17/3-HSD3 modulation (e.g., a 17 / 3-HSD3 inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
  • Inappropriate 17/3-HSD3 functional activity might arise as the result of 17/3-HSD3 expression in cells which normally do not express 17/3-HSD3, decreased 17/3- HSD3 expression or increased 17/3-HSD3 expression.
  • a 17/3-HSD3 -responsive condition or disorder may include a 17/3-HSD3-mediated condition or disorder.
  • HSD-mediated condition or disorder refers to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, activity of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase (HSD).
  • HSD-mediated condition or disorder may be completely or partially characterized by inappropriate HSD activity.
  • an HSD-mediated condition or disorder is one in which modulation of an HSD results in some effect on the underlying condition or disease (e.g., an HSD inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
  • 11/3-HSDl -mediated condition or disorder refers to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 11/3-HSDl activity.
  • a 11/3-HSDl -mediated condition or disorder may be completely or partially characterized by inappropriate 11/3-HSDl activity.
  • a 11/3-HSDl -mediated condition or disorder is one in which modulation of 11 / 3- HSDl results in some effect on the underlying condition or disease (e.g., a 11/3-HSDl inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
  • 1 l/3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder refers to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 11/3-HSD2 activity.
  • a 1 l/3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder may be completely or partially characterized by inappropriate 11/3-HSD2 activity.
  • a 1 l/3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder is one in which modulation of 11/3- HSD2 results in some effect on the underlying condition or disease (e.g., a 11/3-HSD2 inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
  • 17/3-HSD3 -mediated condition or disorder refers to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 17/3-HSD3 activity.
  • a 17/3-HSD3-mediated condition or disorder may be completely or partially characterized by inappropriate 17/3-HSD3 activity.
  • a 17/3-HSD3-mediated condition or disorder is one in which modulation of 17/3- HSD3 results in some effect on the underlying condition or disease (e.g., a 17/3-HSD3 inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
  • ATP is adenosine triphosphate
  • t-BuOH is tert-butyl alcohol
  • CHO is Chinese hamster ovary
  • Dess- Martin Periodinane is l,l,l,-triacetoxy-l,l-dihyro-l,2-benziodoxol-3(lH)-one
  • DIBAL- ⁇ is diisobutyl aluminum hydride
  • DMEM Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium
  • DMF is N,N- dimethylformamide
  • Et 3 N is triethylamine
  • Et 4 NCN is tefraethylammonium cyanide
  • EtOAc is ethyl acetate
  • EtO ⁇ is ethanol
  • LA ⁇ is lithium aluminum hydride
  • LDA is lithium diisopropylamide
  • LiA ⁇ O'Bu ⁇ is lithium tri-tert-butoxyaluminohydride
  • MeO ⁇ is ethanol
  • LA ⁇
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are independently selected from -H, -halo, -OH, -CN, -NO 2 , -C C 8 alkyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, - heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl and -aryl, and at least one of R 1 , R 2 and R 3 is other than -H;
  • R 4 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO 2 , -d-C 8 alkyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, -C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -C 2 -C 8 hydroxyalkyl
  • a first subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L 1 is -C 1 -C 7 alkylene-, L 2 is a direct bond, and R 5 and R 6 , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring.
  • a second subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L 1 is -d-C 7 alkylene-, L 2 is -C 1 -C 7 alkylene-, and R 5 and R 6 , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring.
  • a third subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L 1 is -d-C 7 alkylene-, L 2 is a direct bond, and R 5 and R 6 , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring, and Q is -aryl or -heteroaryl.
  • a fourth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L 1 is -C1-C7 alkylene-, L 2 is -C 1 -C7 alkylene-, and R 5 and R 6 , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring, and Q is -aryl or -heteroaryl.
  • a fifth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L 1 is -d-d alkylene-, L is a direct bond, and R and R , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring, and Q is -COOH or -C(O)NH .
  • a sixth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where 1 "7 1 f
  • L is -d-d alkylene-
  • L is -d-d alkylene-
  • R and R together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring
  • Q is -COOH or -C(O)NH 2 .
  • a seventh subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where R 4 is -H , -alkyl or -C 3 -C 6 hydroxyalkyl.
  • An eighth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where R ⁇ s -OH or -d-Cs alkyl.
  • a ninth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where R 1 is -OH and R 2 and R 3 are independently -Ci-Cs alkyl, or -haloalkyl.
  • a tenth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each -d-C 8 alkyl.
  • An eleventh subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L and L are each a direct bond, R and R together form a cycloalkane ring, and Q is -H. [0121] For each ofthe subclasses above wherein R 5 and R 6 together form a cycloalkane ring, the ring is optionally substituted with from one to three members selected from the substituents described above for "alkyl".
  • aryl e.g., optionally substituted phenyl
  • heteroaryl e.g., optionally substituted imidazolyl, triazolyl or pyridyl
  • heterocycloalkyl e.g., morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl and piperidinyl.
  • R', R" and R'" each independently refer to hydrogen, unsubstituted (d-C 8 )alkyl or (d-C 8 )alkyl substituted with hydroxy, cyano or amino, unsubstituted hetero(C 1 -C 8 )alkyl, unsubstituted aryl and aryl substituted with one to three substituents selected from -halo, unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkoxy, unsubstituted thioalkoxy and unsubstituted aryl(C ⁇ -C 4 )alkyl.
  • Aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl groups directly attached to the cycloalkane ring are optionally substituted.
  • L 1 is -CH 2 - and L 2 is a direct bond.
  • L 1 is a direct bond and L 2 is -CH 2 -.
  • L 1 and L 2 are each -CH 2 -.
  • L and L are each a direct bond.
  • Q is -aryl or -heteroaryl, optionally substituted with up to four groups independently chosen from -d-C 8 alkyl, -halo, -C0 2 R', C(O)N(R') and -CN.
  • Q is pyridyl
  • Q is imidazolyl
  • Q is -COOH
  • Q is -C(O)NH 2 .
  • Q is -H.
  • R 5 and R 6 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cyclopropane ring.
  • R 5 and R 6 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cyclobutane ring.
  • R 5 and R 6 together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cyclopentane ring.
  • R 4 is -H.
  • R 4 is -CH 3 .
  • R 4 is -CH 2 CH 2 OH.
  • R 1 is -OH
  • R 2 is -CH 3
  • R 3 is CF 3 .
  • R 1 is -OH
  • R 2 is -CF 3
  • R 3 is CF 3 .
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , L 1 , L 2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , L 1 , L 2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
  • Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , L 1 , L 2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
  • Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
  • R , R , R , R , R , L , L and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula: wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , L 1 , L 2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
  • Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , L 1 , L 2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
  • Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , L 1 , L 2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
  • the Aryl sulfonyl portion has the formula:
  • the Aryl sulfonyl portion has the formula:
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have a substituted piperazine ring with the following stereochemistry:
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) comprise an aryl sulfonyl piperazine component having the formula and stereochemistry below:
  • Illustrative Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) include the compounds listed below:
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can have asymmetric centers and therefore exist in different enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms.
  • This invention relates to the use of all optical isomers and stereoisomers ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds, and mixtures thereof, and to all pharmaceutical compositions and methods of freatment that may employ or contain them.
  • racemates, racemic mixtures, and stereoisomers, particularly diastereomeric mixtures or diastereomerically pure compounds and enantiomers or enantiomerically pure compounds ofthe above are all encompassed.
  • compositions comprising a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I) and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • the invention further provides Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) that are in isolated and purified form.
  • the invention provides methods for freating diabetes comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I). [0158] The invention also provides methods for treating obesity comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention further provides methods for freating an HSD-mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention further provides methods for freating an 11 / 3-HSD 1 -mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention further provides methods for freating an 11 /3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention further provides methods for freating an 17/3-HSD3 -mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention further provides methods for freating an HSD-responsive condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention further provides methods for freating an 11 /3-HSD 1 -responsive condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention further provides methods for freating an 1 l / 3-HSD2-responsive condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • the invention further provides methods for treating an 17/3-HSD3 -responsive condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
  • Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can be made using synthetic methods well- known to one of ordinary skill in the art of organic synthesis or by using the synthetic procedures outlined below in Schemes 1-2.
  • substituted sulfonamide compounds of formula A can be alkylated using elecfrophile compounds of formula B (wherein LG is an aldehyde or a good leaving group such as a halide, mesylate, or triflate) to provide compounds of Formula (I) using methods well-known to those of skill in the relevant art.
  • the substituent(s) on the sulfonamide aryl ring can be further modified using known procedures to provide the desired compounds of Formula (I). Stereochemistry in the substituent may be set by substrate control, control via an auxiliary, or control via a chiral catalyst.
  • substituted phenylsulfonyl chloride compounds of formula C can be alkylated using piperazine compounds of formula D to provide compounds of Formula (I) using methods well-known to those of skill in the relevant art.
  • the substituent(s) on the sulfonamide aryl ring can be further modified using known procedures to provide the desired compounds of Formula (I).
  • Stereochemistry in the substituent may be set by substrate control, control via an auxiliary, or control via a chiral catalyst.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) can have one or more asymmetric centers and therefore exist in different enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms.
  • An Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be in the form of an optical isomer, an enantiomer, a racemate, or a diastereomer. Accordingly, the invention encompasses Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds and their uses as described herein in the form of their optical isomers, racemates, diastereomers, enantiomers, and mixtures thereof, including a racemic mixture.
  • the synthetic routes provided above can be modified to use different starting materials and alternate reagents to accomplish the desired transformations.
  • the compounds ofthe invention maybe synthesized via bond forming reactions which disconnect any torsional bond present in the compound.
  • Particularly facile synthesis of compounds ofthe invention occurs when the synthesis proceeds via the connection of fragments at the disconnection points a, b, c and d, as shown below for an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I):
  • fragments may be assembled in any order to synthesize compounds ofthe invention.
  • compositions and single unit dosage forms comprising an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable stereoisomer, prodrug, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof, are also encompassed by the invention.
  • Individual dosage forms ofthe invention may be suitable for oral, mucosal (including sub lingual, buccal, rectal, nasal, or vaginal), parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, bolus injection, intraarterial, or intravenous), fransdermal, or topical administration.
  • Single unit dosage forms ofthe invention are suitable for oral, mucosal (e.g., nasal, sublingual, vaginal, buccal, or rectal), parenteral (e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, bolus injection, intramuscular, or intraarterial), or fransdermal adminisfration to a patient.
  • mucosal e.g., nasal, sublingual, vaginal, buccal, or rectal
  • parenteral e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, bolus injection, intramuscular, or intraarterial
  • fransdermal adminisfration e.g., fransdermal adminisfration
  • dosage forms include, but are not limited to: tablets; caplets; capsules, such as soft elastic gelatin capsules; cachets; troches; lozenges; dispersions; suppositories; ointments; cataplasms (poultices); pastes; powders; dressings; creams; plasters; solutions; patches; aerosols (e.g., nasal sprays or inhalers); gels; liquid dosage forms suitable for oral or mucosal adminisfration to a patient, including suspensions (e.g., aqueous or non-aqueous liquid suspensions, oil-in-water emulsions, or a water-in-oil liquid emulsions), solutions, and elixirs; liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral adminisfration to a patient; and sterile solids (e.g., crystalline or amorphous solids) that can be reconstituted to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral adminisfration to a patient.
  • suspensions
  • composition, shape, and type of dosage forms ofthe invention will typically vary depending on their use.
  • a dosage form used in the acute freatment of diabetes or a related disease may contain larger amounts of one or more ofthe active ingredients it comprises than a dosage form used in the chronic treatment ofthe same disease.
  • a parenteral dosage form may contain smaller amounts of one or more ofthe active ingredients it comprises than an oral dosage form used to treat the same disease or disorder.
  • Typical pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprise one or more carriers, excipients or diluents.
  • Suitable excipients are well known to those skilled in the art of pharmacy, and non-limiting examples of suitable excipients are provided herein. Whether a particular excipient is suitable for incorporation into a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form depends on a variety of factors well known in the art including, but not limited to, the way in which the dosage form will be administered to a patient.
  • oral dosage forms such as tablets may contain excipients not suited for use in parenteral dosage forms. The suitability of a particular excipient may also depend on the specific active ingredients in the dosage form.
  • This invention further encompasses anhydrous (e.g., ⁇ 1% water) pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprising active ingredients, since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds.
  • water e.g., 5%
  • water is widely accepted in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long-term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf-life or the stability of formulations over time. See, e.g., Jens T. Carstensen, Drug Stability: Principles & Practice, 2d. Ed., Marcel Dekker, NY, NY, 1995, pp. 379-80.
  • water and heat accelerate the decomposition of some compounds.
  • the effect of water on a formulation can be of great significance since moisture and/or humidity are commonly encountered during manufacture, handling, packaging, storage, shipment, and use of formulations.
  • Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms ofthe invention can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise lactose and at least one active ingredient that comprises a primary or secondary amine are preferably anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected.
  • anhydrous pharmaceutical composition should be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained. Accordingly, anhydrous compositions are preferably packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastics, unit dose containers (e.g., vials), blister packs, and strip packs.
  • compositions and dosage forms that comprise one or more compounds that reduce the rate by which an active ingredient will decompose.
  • compounds which are referred to herein as “stabilizers,” include, but are not limited to, antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, pH buffers, or salt buffers.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be administered to a mammal (human, mouse, rat, rabbit, dog, cat, bovine, pig, monkey etc.) as an 11/3-HSDl modulator, a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of diabetes, a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of diabetic complication (retinopathy, nephropathy, neuropathy, cardiac infarction and cerebral infarction based on arteriosclerosis etc.), a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of hyperlipemia, a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of obesity, neurodegenerative disease and the like, or a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of diseases mediated by 11/3-HSDl.
  • a mammal human, mouse, rat, rabbit, dog, cat, bovine, pig, monkey etc.
  • an 11/3-HSDl modulator a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of diabetes
  • a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of diabetic complication retinopathy, nephropathy, neuropathy, cardiac infarction and cerebral infarction
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be administered to a mammal concurrently with an additional therapeutic agent for the treatment of a disease, such as diabetes or obesity, with the aim ofthe prophylaxis or freatment of a disease.
  • a disease such as diabetes or obesity
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe present invention can be administered in combination with other therapeutic agents for the freatment or prevention of numerous diseases, including, but not limited to, diabetes and obesity.
  • the compounds of the invention may be administered by oral, parenteral (e.g., inframuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, ICV, infracisternal injection or infusion, subcutaneous injection or implant), inhalation, nasal, vaginal, rectal, sublingual, or topical (e.g., fransdermal, local) routes of administration and may be formulated, alone or together, in suitable dosage unit formulations containing conventional non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants and vehicles appropriate for each route of adminisfration.
  • the invention also contemplates adminisfration ofthe compounds ofthe invention in a depot formulation, in which the active ingredient is released over a defined time period.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound may be administered simultaneously with other another therapeutic agent that is useful for the freatment or prevention of diabetes, obesity or other disease or may be administered at a time prior to or subsequent to another therapeutic agent.
  • a pharmaceutical composition containing the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and an additional therapeutic agent can be administered.
  • a pharmaceutical composition containing the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and a pharmaceutical composition containing an additional therapeutic agent may be administered separately.
  • the adminisfration routes of respective pharmaceutical compositions may be the same or different.
  • the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound may be administered at a dose of 50 mg to 800 mg per adminisfration, which is given once to several times a day. In addition, the compound may be administered at a smaller dose.
  • the combined pharmaceutical agent can be administered at a dose generally employed for the prophylaxis or freatment of diabetes or obesity or at a smaller dose than that.
  • the amounts and specific types of active ingredients in a dosage form may differ depending on factors such as, but not limited to, the route by which it is to be administered to patients.
  • typical dosage forms ofthe invention comprise an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate, polymorph or prodrug thereof.
  • an appropriate dosage level will generally be from about 0.001 to about 100 mg per kg patient body weight per day which can be administered in single or multiple doses.
  • the dosage level will be from about 0.01 to about 25 mg/kg per day; more preferably from about 0.05 to about 10 mg/kg per day.
  • a suitable dosage level may be from about 0.01 to about 25 mg/kg per day, about 0.05 to about 10 mg/kg per day, or about 0.1 to about 5 mg/kg per day. Within this range the dosage may be from about 0.005 to about 0.05, about 0.05 to about 0.5 or about 0.5 to about 5.0 mg/kg per day.
  • the dosage levels lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 2000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose in the morning but preferably as divided doses throughout the day taken with food. More preferably, the daily dose is administered twice daily in equally divided doses.
  • a daily dose range should be from about 5 mg to about 500 mg per day, more preferably, between about 10 mg and about 200 mg per day. In managing the patient, the therapy should be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps from about 1 mg to about 25 mg, and increased if necessary up to from about 200 mg to about 2000 mg per day as either a single dose or divided doses, depending on the patient's global response.
  • the weight ratio ofthe compound ofthe invention to the second active ingredient may be varied and will depend upon the effective dose of each ingredient. Generally, an effective dose of each will be used. Thus, for example, when a compound ofthe invention is combined with an NSAID, the weight ratio ofthe compound of the invention to the NSATD will generally range from about 1000:1 to about 1:1000, preferably about 200:1 to about 1:200. Combinations of a compound ofthe invention and other active ingredients will generally also be within the aforementioned range, but in each case, an effective dose of each active ingredient should be used.
  • compositions ofthe invention that are suitable for oral adminisfration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, including, but are not limited to, tablets (e.g., chewable tablets), caplets, capsules, and liquids (e.g., flavored syrups).
  • dosage forms contain predetermined amounts of active ingredients, and may be prepared by methods of pharmacy well known to those skilled in the art. See generally, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
  • Typical oral dosage forms ofthe invention are prepared by combining the active ingredient(s) in an intimate admixture with at least one excipient according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques.
  • Excipients can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for admimsfration.
  • excipients suitable for use in oral liquid or aerosol dosage forms include, but are not limited to, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, and coloring agents.
  • excipients suitable for use in solid oral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, starches, sugars, micro-crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents.
  • tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit forms, in which case solid excipients are employed. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such dosage forms can be prepared by any ofthe methods of pharmacy. In general, pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredients with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product into the desired presentation if necessary.
  • a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding.
  • Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredients in a free- flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient.
  • Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture ofthe powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • excipients that can be used in oral dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, binders, fillers, disintegrants, and lubricants.
  • Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, (e.g., Nos. 2208, 2906, 2910), microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof.
  • fillers suitable for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dexfrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof.
  • the binder or filler in pharmaceutical compositions ofthe invention is typically present in from about 50 to about 99 weight percent ofthe pharmaceutical composition or dosage form.
  • Suitable forms of microcrystalline cellulose include, but are not limited to, the materials sold as AVICEL-PH-101, AVICEL-PH-103 AVICEL RC-581, AVICEL-PH-105 (available from FMC Corporation, American Viscose Division, Avicel Sales, Marcus Hook, PA), and mixtures thereof.
  • An specific binder is a mixture of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose sold as AVICEL RC-581.
  • Suitable anhydrous or low moisture excipients or additives include AVICEL-PH-103TM and Starch 1500 LM.
  • Disintegrants are used in the compositions ofthe invention to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Tablets that contain too much disintegrant may disintegrate in storage, while those that contain too little may not disintegrate at a desired rate or under the desired conditions. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too much nor too little to detrimentally alter the release ofthe active ingredients should be used to form solid oral dosage forms ofthe invention.
  • the amount of disintegrant used varies based upon the type of formulation, and is readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art. Typical pharmaceutical compositions comprise from about 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, specifically from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant.
  • Disintegrants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, and mixtures thereof.
  • Lubricants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms ofthe invention include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laureate, agar, and mixtures thereof.
  • calcium stearate e.g., magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc
  • hydrogenated vegetable oil e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil
  • Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. of Baltimore, MD), a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica (marketed by Degussa Co. of Piano, TX), CAB-0-SIL (a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, MA), and mixtures thereof. If used at all, lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent ofthe pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are incorporated.
  • AEROSIL 200 manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. of Baltimore, MD
  • a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica marketed by Degussa Co. of Piano, TX
  • CAB-0-SIL a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, MA
  • lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent ofthe pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are incorporated.
  • the compositions are preferably provided in the form of tablets containing about 1 to about 1000 milligrams ofthe active ingredient, hi other embodiments, the compositions are provided in provided in the form of tablets containing about 1.0, about 5.0, about 10.0, about 15.0. about 20.0, about 25.0, about 50.0, about 75.0, about 100.0, about 150.0, about 200.0, about 250.0, about 300.0, about 400.0, about 500.0, about 600.0, about 750.0, about 800.0, about 900.0, or about 1000.0 milligrams ofthe active ingredient for the symptomatic adjustment ofthe dosage to the patient to be treated.
  • the compounds may be administered on a regimen of 1 to 4 times per day, preferably once or twice per day.
  • Active ingredients ofthe invention can be administered by controlled release means or by delivery devices that are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Patent Nos.: 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; and 4,008,719, 5,674,533, 5,059,595, 5,591,767, 5,120,548, 5,073,543, 5,639,476, 5,354,556, and 5,733,566, each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Such dosage forms can be used to provide slow or confrolled-release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer coatings, microp articles, liposomes, microspheres, or a combination thereof to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions.
  • Suitable confrolled-release formulations known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including those described herein, can be readily selected for use with the active ingredients ofthe invention.
  • the invention thus encompasses single unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gelcaps, and caplets that are adapted for confrolled-release.
  • Confrolled-release pharmaceutical products can improve drug therapy over that achieved by their non-controlled counterparts.
  • the use of an optimally designed confrolled-release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to cure or control the condition in a minimum amount of time.
  • confrolled-release formulations include extended activity ofthe drug, reduced dosage frequency, and increased patient compliance, hi addition, confrolled-release formulations can be used to affect the time of onset of action or other characteristics, such as blood levels ofthe drug, and can thus affect the occurrence of side (e.g., adverse) effects.
  • confrolled-release formulations are designed to initially release an amount of drug (active ingredient) that promptly produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually and continually release of other amounts of drug to maintain this level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time.
  • drug active ingredient
  • Confrolled-release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, temperature, enzymes, water, or other physiological conditions or compounds.
  • Parenteral dosage forms can be administered to patients by various routes including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous (including bolus injection), inframuscular, and infra-arterial. Because their adminisfration typically bypasses patients' natural defenses against contaminants, parenteral dosage forms are preferably sterile or capable of being sterilized prior to administration to a patient. Examples of parenteral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, solutions ready for injection, dry products ready to be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle for injection, suspensions ready for injection, and emulsions. For example, lyophilized sterile compositions suitable for reconstitution into particulate-free dosage forms suitable for adminisfration to humans.
  • Suitable vehicles that can be used to provide parenteral dosage forms ofthe invention are well known to those skilled in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to: Water for Injection USP; aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dexfrose Injection, Dexfrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer's Injection; water-miscible vehicles such as, but not limited to, ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol; and non-aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, and benzyl benzoate.
  • water for Injection USP Water for Injection USP
  • aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dexfrose Injection, Dexfrose and
  • Parenteral dosage forms are preferred for the methods of preventing, treating or managing disease in a cancer patient.
  • Transdermal and topical dosage forms ofthe invention include, but are not limited to, creams, lotions, ointments, gels, solutions, emulsions, suspensions, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985).
  • Transdermal dosage forms include "reservoir type” or "matrix type” patches, which can be applied to the skin and worn for a specific period of time to permit the penetration of a desired amount of active ingredients.
  • Suitable excipients e.g., carriers and diluents
  • other materials that can be used to provide transdermal and topical dosage forms encompassed by this invention are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular tissue to which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be applied.
  • excipients include, but are not limited to, water, acetone, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane- 1, 3 -diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof to form lotions, tinctures, creams, emulsions, gels or ointments, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • Moisturizers or humectants can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms if desired. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
  • penetration enhancers can be used to assist in delivering the active ingredients to the tissue.
  • Suitable penetration enhancers include, but are not limited to: acetone; various alcohols such as ethanol, oleyl, and tefrahydrofuryl; alkyl sulfoxides such as dimethyl sulfoxide; dimethyl acetamide; dimethyl formamide; polyethylene glycol; pyrrolidones such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; Kollidon grades (Povidone, Polyvidone); urea; and various water-soluble or insoluble sugar esters such as Tween 80 (polysorbate 80) and Span 60 (sorbitan monostearate).
  • the pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or ofthe tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied may also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients.
  • the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery.
  • Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery.
  • stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the formulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent.
  • Different salts, hydrates or solvates ofthe active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties ofthe resulting composition.
  • Mucosal dosage forms ofthe invention include, but are not limited to, ophthalmic solutions, sprays and aerosols, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985). Dosage forms suitable for treating mucosal tissues within the oral cavity can be formulated as mouthwashes or as oral gels.
  • the aerosol comprises a carrier. In another embodiment, the aerosol is carrier free.
  • a compound ofthe invention can also be administered directly to the lung by inhalation (see e.g., Tong et al., PCT Application, WO 97/39745; Clark et al, PCT Application, WO 99/47196, which are herein incorporated by reference).
  • inhalation see e.g., Tong et al., PCT Application, WO 97/39745; Clark et al, PCT Application, WO 99/47196, which are herein incorporated by reference.
  • an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be conveniently delivered to the lung by a number of different devices.
  • a Metered Dose Inhaler which utilizes canisters that contain a suitable low boiling propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas can be used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound directly to the lung.
  • MDI devices are available from a number of suppliers such as 3M Corporation, Aventis, Boehringer Ingleheim, Forest Laboratories, Glaxo- Wellcome, Schering Plough and Vectura.
  • a Dry Powder Inhaler (DPI) device can be used to administer an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound to the lung (See, e.g., Raleigh et al, Proc. Amer. Assoc. Cancer Research Annual Meeting, 1999, 40, 397, which is herein incorporated by reference).
  • DPI devices typically use a mechanism such as a burst of gas to create a cloud of dry powder inside a container, which can then be inhaled by the patient.
  • DPI devices are also well known in the art and can be purchased from a number of vendors which include, for example, Fisons, Glaxo- Wellcome, Inhale Therapeutic Systems, ML Laboratories, Qdose and Vectura.
  • MDDPI multiple dose DPI
  • a popular variation is the multiple dose DPI (“MDDPI”) system, which allows for the delivery of more than one therapeutic dose.
  • MDDPI devices are available from companies such as AsfraZeneca, Glaxo Wellcome, IV AX, Schering Plough, SkyePharma and Vectura.
  • capsules and cartridges of gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator can be formulated containing a powder mix ofthe compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch for these systems.
  • Aryl Sulfonamide Compound Another type of device that can be used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound to the lung is a liquid spray device supplied, for example, by Aradigm Corporation.
  • Liquid spray systems use extremely small nozzle holes to aerosolize liquid drug formulations that can then be directly inhaled into the lung.
  • a nebulizer device is used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound to the lung.
  • Nebulizers create aerosols from liquid drug formulations by using, for example, ultrasonic energy to form fine particles that can be readily inhaled (See e.g., Verschoyle et al, British J Cancer, 1999, 80, Suppl 2, 96, which is herein incorporated by reference).
  • Examples of nebulizers include devices supplied by Sheffield/Systemic Pulmonary Delivery Ltd. (See, Armer et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,954,047; van der Linden et al., U.S. Pat. No.
  • Inhaled compound ofthe invention delivered by nebulizer devices, is currently under investigation as a freatment for aerodigestive cancer (Engelke et al., Poster 342 at American Association of Cancer Research, San Francisco, Calif, Apr. 1-5, 2000) and lung cancer (Dahl et al., Poster 524 at American Association of Cancer Research, San Francisco, Calif., April 1- 5, 2000).
  • an electrohydrodynamic (“EHD”) aerosol device is used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound to the lung.
  • EHD aerosol devices use electrical energy to aerosolize liquid drug solutions or suspensions (see e.g., Noakes et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,765,539; Coffee, U.S. Pat. No., 4,962,885; Coffee, PCT Application, WO 94/12285; Coffee, PCT Application, WO 94/14543; Coffee, PCT Application, WO 95/26234, Coffee, PCT Application, WO 95/26235, Coffee, PCT Application, WO 95/32807, which are herein incorporated by reference).
  • the electrochemical properties ofthe compound ofthe invention formulation may be important parameters to optimize when delivering this drug to the lung with an EHD aerosol device and such optimization is routinely performed by one of skill in the art.
  • EHD aerosol devices may more efficiently delivery drugs to the lung than existing pulmonary delivery technologies.
  • Other methods of infra-pulmonary delivery of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.
  • Liquid drug formulations suitable for use with nebulizers and liquid spray devices and EHD aerosol devices will typically include an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is a liquid such as alcohol, water, polyethylene glycol or a perfluorocarbon.
  • another material may be added to alter the aerosol properties ofthe solution or suspension of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • this material is liquid such as an alcohol, glycol, polyglycol or a fatty acid.
  • Other methods of formulating liquid drug solutions or suspension suitable for use in aerosol devices are known to those of skill in the art (See, e.g., Biesalski, U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • a compound ofthe invention can also be formulated in rectal or vaginal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides.
  • an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can also be formulated as a depot preparation.
  • Such long acting formulations can be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by inframuscular injection.
  • the compounds can be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example, as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
  • Liposomes and emulsions are well known examples of delivery vehicles that can be used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • Certain organic solvents such as dimethylsulfoxide can also be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity.
  • a compound ofthe invention can also be delivered in a confrolled release system.
  • a pump can be used (Sefton, CRC Grit. Ref Biomed Eng., 1987, 14, 201; Buchwald et al., Surgery, 1980, 88, 507; Saudek et al., N. Engl. J Med, 1989, 321, 574).
  • polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Confrolled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Fla. (1974); Confrolled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem., 1983, 23, 61; see also Levy et al., Science 1985, 228, 190; During et al., Ann. Neurol., 1989,25,351; Howard et al., 1989, J. Neurosurg. 71, 105).
  • a confrolled-release system can be placed in proximity of the target ofthe compounds ofthe invention, e.g., the lung, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Confrolled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115 (1984)).
  • Other confrolled-release system can be used (see e.g., Langer, Science, 1990, 249, 1527).
  • Suitable excipients e.g., carriers and diluents
  • excipients include, but are not limited to, water, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane- 1, 3 -diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
  • the pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied can also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients.
  • the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery.
  • Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophihcity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery.
  • stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the formulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent.
  • Different salts, hydrates or solvates ofthe active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties ofthe resulting composition.
  • the invention provides methods of freating or preventing a condition or disorder associated with the modulation of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases by administering to a patient having such a condition or disorder a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or composition of the invention.
  • conditions and disorders including chronic diseases of humans or other species, can be freated with modulators, stimulators, or inhibitors of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, such as 11/3-HSDl. TREATMENT OR PREVENTION OF DIABETES
  • Diabetes and diabetic conditions can be freated or prevented by adminisfration of a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • Types of diabetes that can be freated or prevented by administering a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound include type I diabetes mellitus (juvenile onset diabetes, insulin dependent-diabetes mellitus or IDDM), type II diabetes mellitus (non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus or NIDDM), insulinopathies, diabetes associated with pancreatic disorders, diabetes associated with other disorders (such as Cushing's Syndrome, acromegaly, pheochromocytoma, glucagonoma, primary aldosteronism, and somatostatinoma), type A and type B insulin resistance syndromes, lipafrophic diabetes, and diabetes induced by ⁇ -cell toxins.
  • IDDM insulin dependent-diabetes mellitus
  • NIDDM non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus
  • insulinopathies diabetes associated with pancreatic disorders, diabetes associated with other disorders (such as Cushing's Syndrome, acromegaly, phe
  • the type of diabetes being freated is type II diabetes.
  • Obesity can be freated or prevented by adminisfration of a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • Obesity may have genetic, environmental (e.g., expending less energy than is consumed) and regulatory determinants.
  • Obesity includes exogenous, hyperinsulinar, hyperplasmic, hypothyroid, hypothalamic, symptomatic, infantile, upper body, alimentary, hypogonadal, simple and central obesity, hypophyseal adiposity and hyperphagia.
  • Metabolic disorders such as hyperlidemia and diabetes, and cardiovascular disorders, such as hypertension and coronary artery disease, are commonly associated with obesity.
  • Complications due to obesity may also be freated or prevented by administering a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • Such complications include, but are not limited to, sleep apnea, Pickwickian syndrome, orthopedic disturbances of weight-bearing and non-weight-bearing joints, and skin disorders resulting from increased sweat or skin secretions.
  • Conditions that can be treated or prevented by administering a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound include, but are not limited to any condition which is responsive to the modulation, preferably inhibition, of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases or specific isoforms thereof, and thereby benefit from adminisfration of such a modulator.
  • Representative conditions in this regard include, but are not limited to, These conditions and disorders include, but are not limited to, metabolic disorders and related cardiovascular risk factors such as syndrome X, polycystic ovarian disease, eating disorders (e.g., anorexia and bulimia), craniopharyngioma, Prader-Willi syndrome, Frohlich's syndrome, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, low HDL levels, high HDL levels, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia and Cushing's syndrome; diseases associated therewith such as hypertension, atherosclerosis, vascular restenosis, retinopathy and nephropathy; neurologic disorders such as neurodegenerative disease, neuropathy and muscle wasting; cognitive disorders, such as age- related learning disorders; androgen and/or estrogen-related disorders such as prostate cancer, colon cancer, breast cancer, benign prostatic hyperplasia, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, and male pseudohermaphrodism; endo
  • the present methods for treating or preventing further comprise the adminisfration of a therapeutically effective amoimt of another therapeutic agent useful for freating or preventing the diseases or disorders disclosed herein.
  • the time in which the therapeutic effect ofthe other therapeutic agent is exerted overlaps with the time in which the therapeutic effect ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compound is exerted.
  • the compounds ofthe invention can be combined or used in combination with other agents useful in the treatment, prevention, suppression or amelioration ofthe conditions or disorders for which compounds ofthe invention are useful, including diabetes, obesity, glaucoma, osteoporosis, cognitive disorders, immune disorders, depression and those pathologies noted above.
  • Such other agents, or drugs may be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, simultaneously or sequentially with an Aryl Sulfonamide
  • compositions of the invention include those that also contain one or more other active ingredients or therapeutic agents, in addition to an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
  • an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be administered with another therapeutic agent, including, but not limited to, anti-diabetic agents such as insulin, inhaled insulin (Exubera®), insulin mimetics, insulin secretogues, sulfonylureas (e.g., glyburide, meglinatide, glimepiride, gliclazide, glipizide, gliquidone, chloropropresponsivemide, tolbutamide, acetohexamide, glycopyramide, carbutamide, glibonuride, glisoxepid, glybuthiazole, glibuzole, glyhexamide, glymidine, glypinamide, phenbutamide, tolcylamide and tolazamide), biguanides (e.g., metformin (Glucophage ® )), -glucosidase inhibitors (e.g., a), metformin (Glucophage ® )),
  • an Aryl for the treatment or prevention of obesity, an Aryl
  • Sulfonamide Compound can be administered with another therapeutic agent, including, but not limited to, /33 adrenergic receptor agonists, leptin or derivatives thereof, neuropeptide Y (e.g., NPY5) antagonists, and mazindol.
  • another therapeutic agent including, but not limited to, /33 adrenergic receptor agonists, leptin or derivatives thereof, neuropeptide Y (e.g., NPY5) antagonists, and mazindol.
  • Examples of other therapeutic agents that may be combined with an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, either administered separately or in the same pharmaceutical compositions, include, but are not limited to: (i) cholesterol lowering agents such as HMG- CoA reductase inhibitors (e.g., lovastatin, simvastatin (Zocor®), pravastatin, fluvastatin, atorvastatin (Lipitor®) and other statins), bile acid sequesvers (e.g., cholestyramine and colestipol), vitamin B 3 (also known as nicotinic acid, or niacin), vitamin B 6 (pyridoxine), vitamin B 12 (cyanocobalamin), fibric acid derivatives (e.g., gemfibrozil, clofibrate, fenofibrate and benzafibrate), probucol, nitroglycerin, and inhibitors of cholesterol absorption (e.g., beta-sitosterol and
  • the weight ratio ofthe compound ofthe invention to the second active ingredient may be varied and will depend upon the effective dose of each ingredient. Generally, an effective dose of each will be used. Thus, for example, when an Aryl Sulfonamide
  • the weight ratio ofthe compound ofthe invention to the NSAID will generally range from about 1000:1 to about 1:1000, preferably about 200:1 to about 1:200.
  • Combinations of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and other active ingredients will generally also be within the aforementioned range, but in each case, an effective dose of each active ingredient should be used.
  • the invention encompasses kits that can simplify the adminisfration of the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds or composition ofthe invention to a patient.
  • a typical kit of the invention comprises a unit dosage of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, hi one embodiment, the unit dosage form is in a container, which can be sterile, containing a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle. In another embodiment, the unit dosage form is in a container containing a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound as a lyophilate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hi this instance, the kit can further comprise another container that contains a solution useful for the reconstitution ofthe lyophilate or dissolution ofthe salt. The kit can also comprise a label or printed instructions for use ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds.
  • the kit comprises a unit dosage form of a composition of the invention.
  • Kits ofthe invention can further comprise one or more devices that are useful for administering the unit dosage forms ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds or a composition of the invention.
  • devices include, but are not limited to, a syringe, a drip bag, a patch or an enema, which optionally contain the unit dosage forms.
  • Step a l-Pyridm-4-yl-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester.
  • a 500 mL flask was charged with 2.5 g ethyl 4-pyridylacetate (15.15 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), 45 mL THF and 45 mL DMF, followed by the addition of 1.8 g sodium hydride (75.0 mmol, 5.0 equiv.). The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 15 min, and then 2 mL 1,2- dibromoethane (46.38 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) was introduced via an addition funnel.
  • Step b (l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropyl) methanol.
  • a 100 mL flask containing 165 mg l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 10 mL THF was carefully added 3.0 mL of 1.0 M DIBAL-H in toluene.
  • the reaction was allowed to stir for 1 h at which it was diluted with 5 mL of 1 N HC1.
  • the solution was then extracted (2 x MeOH/C ⁇ kCfe), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na 2 SO 4 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step c 4-(l-ChloromethyIcyclopropyl) pyridine.
  • a 250 mL flask containing 333 mg of l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethanol 2.23 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 10 mL CH 2 C1 2 under N 2 was added 0.18 mL thionyl chloride (2.46 mmol, 1.1 equiv.). After stirring for 2 h, the solution was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the product as a white solid which was sufficiently pure to continue to the next step.
  • Step d (R)-3-Methyl-l-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine.
  • a 250 mL flask was charged with 250 mg (R)-(-)-2-methylpiperazine (10.0 mmol, 2.5 equiv.), 334 mg 4-(l-chloromethylcyclopropyl) pyridine (2.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 15 mL acetonitrile.
  • the flask was equipped with a reflux condenser, and then placed into a preheated 100 °C bath.
  • a portion ofthe product obtained above (462 mg, 2.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 10 mL CH 2 C1 2 was combined in a flask with 436 mg 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (1.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 0.34 mL triethylamine (2.0 mmol, 1.2 equiv.).
  • Step f l,l,l-Trifluoro-2- ⁇ 4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l-pyridm-4-yl-cyclopylmethyl) piperazine-l-sulfonyl]phenyl ⁇ propan-2-ol (1).
  • Step a 4-(l,l,l,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol-2-yl)benzenesulfonyl chloride.
  • 4-(hexafluoro-2-hydroxylisopropyl)aniline (15.0g, 58 mmol)
  • HC1 37% in water, 30 mL
  • CH 3 COOH 9 mL
  • NaNO 2 4.4g, 64 mmol
  • Step b Using the same methods as Example 1, and substituting 4-(l, 1,1,3,3,3- hexafluoropropan-2-ol-2-yl)benzenesulfonyl chloride for 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride in step e of Example 1, l,l,l,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2- ⁇ 4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l-pyridin-4-yl- cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl]phenyl ⁇ -propan-2-ol (4) was prepared.
  • Step a 2-Pyridin-3-yl-methylmalonic acid monoethyl ester.
  • a stirred solution of 2.72 mL diisopropylamine (19.55 mmol, 2.3 equiv.) in THF under N 2 was cooled to -10 °C and freated with 7.5 mL of n-BuLi in hexane. After 10 min, the mixture was cooled to -78 °C and 3-pyridin-3-yl-propionic acid ethyl ester (1.4 g, 8.5 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was added. After stirring for an additional 20 min.
  • Step b 2-Pyridin-3-yl-methylacrylic acid ethyl ester.
  • 2-pyridin-3-yl- methylmalonic acid monoethyl ester (8.5 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a flask with 73 mg piperazine (0.85 mmol, 0.1 equiv.), 255 mg paraformaldehyde (8.5 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 15 mL pyridine.
  • the mixture was refluxed for 2 h, cooled to room temperature and then diluted with saturated NaHCO 3 .
  • the solution was exfracted (2x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), concentrated under reduced pressure to provide 0.92 g of the product as a white solid (4.82 mmol).
  • Step c l-Pyridin-3-yl-methylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester.
  • 2-pyridin-3-ylmethylacrylic acid monoethyl ester (4.07 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 25 mL CH 2 C1 2 under N 2 was added a solution of diazomethane (16.60 mmol, 4.08 equiv.) in ether. After stirring for 24 h, the solution was quenched with acetic acid and followed by saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 , and then extracted with 10% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • Step d l,l,l,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2- ⁇ 4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l-pyridin-3-yl- methylcyclopropylmethyl) piperazine-l-sulfonyl]phenyl ⁇ propan-2-ol (5).
  • Step a l-(6-Chloro-pyridin-3-yl) cyclopropanecarbaldehyde. 1.52 g Dess- Martin periodinane (3.6 mmol, 1.2 equiv.) was added to a solution of 549 mg [l-(6-chloro- ⁇ yridin-3-yl)cyclopropyl] methanol (3.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 30 mL THF. After stirring for 3 h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO 3 , exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na 2 SO 4 ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification of the residue by flash chromatography (SiO 2 , 5% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ) provided the product as a yellow solid (0.5 g, 2.75 mmol).
  • Step b (R)-l-[l-(6 ⁇ Chloro-pyridin-3-yl) cyclopropylmethyl]-3- methylpiperazine.
  • (R)-(-)-2-methylpiperiazine 13.81 mmol, 5.0 equiv.
  • 500 mg l-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yl) cyclopropanecarbaldehyde 2.76 "mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 40 mL 1
  • 2-dichloroethane was added 1.17 g NaBH(OAc) 3 (5.52 mmol, 2 equiv.).
  • Step c 2-(4- ⁇ 4-[l-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yl)cyclopropylmethyl]-2-(R)-methyl- piperazine-l-sulfonyl ⁇ phenyl)-l,l,l,l-trifluoro-propan-2-ol (6).
  • Step a [l-(tert-Butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropyl] methanol.
  • tert-Butyldimethylsilyl chloride (4.5 g, 30.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was added to a suspension of 3 g l,l-bis(hydroxymethyl) cyclopropane (30.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 4.08 g imidazole (60 mmol, 2 equiv.) in THF at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 30 min, and water was added.
  • Step b Methanesulfonic acid l-(f ⁇ r ⁇ butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropylmethyl ester.
  • Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.92 mL, 2.0 mmol, 1.2 equiv.) was added to a solution of 2.16 g [l-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropyl] methanol (10.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 2.5 mL triethylamine (20 mmol, 2 equiv.) in 20 mL CH 2 C1 2 at 0 °C.
  • Step c [l-(tert-ButyldimethyIsilanyloxymethyl)cyclopropylmethyl]-3-(R)- methylpiperazine.
  • Methanesulfonic acid[ 1 -(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropylmethyl ester (1.5 g, 5.1 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a sealed tube with 1.28 g (R)-2-methylpiperazine (12.76 mmol, 2.5 equiv.).
  • the mixture was heated at 130 °C for 24 h, cooled to room temperature and diluted with saturated NaHCO 3 .
  • the solution was exfracted (2 x 10%) MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na 2 SO 4 ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide a colorless liquid which was used in the next step.
  • Step d l,l,l-trifluoro-2- ⁇ 4-[4-(l-hydroxymethyl-l-yl-cyclopropyImethyl]-2-(R)- methylpiperazine-l-sulfonyl]phenyl ⁇ propan-2-ol (7).
  • steps e and fin Example 1 substituting (R)-l-[l-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropylmethyl] -3- methylpiperazine for (R)-3 -methyl- l-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine in step e, Compound 7 was prepared.
  • Step a (1 -Hydroxy methylcyclopropyl) acetonitrile. 5,7-Dioxa-spiro[2.5] octan- 6-one (1.48 g, 10.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a flask with 3.12 g tetraethylammoniumcyanide (20.0 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) in 30 mL DMF. The mixture was heated at 70 °C for 24 h, cooled to room temperature and diluted with saturated NaHCO 3 .
  • the solution was exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na 2 SO 4 ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide 360 mg ofthe product as a colorless liquid which was used in the next step.
  • Step a l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester.
  • pyridin-4-yl-acetic acid ethyl ester 20.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.
  • THF 30.0 mmol
  • DMF 30.0 mmol
  • DMF 30.0 mmol
  • 1,3-Dibromo-propane 30.0 mmol, 1.5 equiv.
  • Step b (l-Pyridin-4-yI-cyclobutyl)-methanol.
  • To a 250 mL flask was charged with the product obtained above (2.0 g, 9.7 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 10 mL THF.
  • 30 mL DIBAL-H (1.0 mL in Hexanes, 30 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) was added in a flask.
  • the resulting solution was allowed to stir for 2 h and then was diluted with saturated NaHCO and extracted (4 x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ).
  • the organics were dried (MgSO ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO 2 , 3% MeOH/CH 2 Ci 2 ) provided mthe product as a yellow oil (0.78 g, 4.8mmol).
  • Step c Methanesulfonic acid l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutylmethyl ester.
  • a portion ofthe product obtained above (750 mg, 4.6 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 50 mL CH 2 C1 2 was combined in a flask with 700 mg triethylamine (6.9 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) and 580 mg methanesulfonic acid chloride (5.1 mmol, 1.1 equiv.). The solution was allowed to stir for 1/2 h followed by dilution with saturated NaHC0 3 and extracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ). The organics were dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step d l-(l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutylmethyl)piperazine.
  • a portion ofthe product obtained above (200 mg, 0.83 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a pressure tube with 500 mg Piperazine. The resulting mixture was then placed into a preheated 100 °C bath. After stirring for 4 h, the mixture was diluted with 50mL CH 2 CI 2 and saturated NaHC0 3 , exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Ci 2 ). The organics were dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (Si0 2 , 4% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 , 8%
  • Step d l- ⁇ 4-[4-(l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutylmethyl)-piperazine-l-sulfonyl]- phenyl ⁇ -ethanone.
  • the product obtained above 160 mg, 0.69 mmol, 1.0 equiv.
  • 5 mL CH 2 C1 2 was combined in a flask with 152 mg 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (0.69 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 142 mg triethylamine (1.40 mmol, 2.0 equiv.).
  • the solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by dilution with 20 mL CH 2 C1 2 .
  • Step a 1-Hydroxymethylcyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester.
  • cyclobutane-l,l-dicarboxylic acid diethyl ester 25.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.
  • THF 5.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.
  • lithium tri-tert-butoxyaluminohydride 1.0M in THF, 55 mmol, 2.2 equiv.
  • the solution was heated at reflux for 5h before cooled to room temperature.
  • the suspension was diluted with Saturated NH C1. After stirring for lh, the suspension was filtered through Buckner funnel.
  • Step b 1-Formylcyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester.
  • Step c l-[3-(R )-Methyl-piperazin-l-ylmethyl]-cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester.
  • the product obtained above (470 mg, 3.0mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 25 mL 1,2- dichloro-ethane was combined in a flask with 750 mg (R)-(-)-2-methylpiperazine (7.5mmol, 2.5 equiv.) and several drops of acetic acid.
  • 2.54 g of sodium triacetoxyborohydride (12.0 mmol, 4.0 equiv.) was added and the suspension was allowed to stir overnight.
  • the mixture was diluted with saturated NaHCO 3 , exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ), dried (MgSO 4 ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step d l ⁇ [4-(4-Acetyl-benzenesulfonyl)-3-( R )-methyl-piperazin ⁇ l-ylmethyI]- cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester.
  • the residue obtained above in 6 mL CH 2 CI 2 was combined in a flask with 272 mg 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (1.25mmol) and 250 mg triethylamine (2.5 mmol). The solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by dilution with 20 mL CH 2 ⁇ 2 and saturated NaHCO 3 .
  • Step e l- ⁇ 3-(R )-Methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl ⁇ -cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester.
  • Step f l- ⁇ 3-(R )-Methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesuIfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl ⁇ -cyclobutanecarboxylic acid.
  • Step g. l- ⁇ 3-(R)-MethyI-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl ⁇ -cyclobutanecarboxylic acid amide (13).
  • Step a 1-Hydroxymethyl-cyclopropanecarbonitrile.
  • 1-cyano-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester 2.0 g, 14.4 mmol, 1.0 equiv.
  • ethylene glycol dimethyl ether 100 mL
  • MeOH 10 mL
  • NaBH 4 4.4 g, 115.0 mmol, 8.0 equiv.
  • the suspension was diluted with Saturated NaHCO 3 slowly, exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ), dried (MgSO 4 ), and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO 2 , CH 2 C1 2 , 5% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ) provided the product as a colorless oil (1.25 g, 12.9 mmol).
  • Step b Methanesulfonic acid 1-cyano-cyclopropylmethyl ester.
  • the product obtained above (1.25 mg, 12.9 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 30 mL CH 2 C1 2 was combined in a flask with 2.6 g triethylamine (25.8 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) and 1.92 g methanesulfonic acid chloride (16.8. mmol, 1.3 equiv.) at 0 °C.
  • the solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by dilution with saturated NaHCO 3 and exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 ).
  • Step c l-(3-(R )-Methyl-piperazin-l-ylmethyl)-cyclopropanecarbonitrile.
  • the product obtained above (1.9 g, 10.8 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a pressure tube with 2.7 g (R)-(-)-2-methylpiperazine( 27.1 mmol, 2.5equiv.). The resulting mixture was then placed into a preheated 100 °C bath. After stirring for 12h, the mixture was cooled to room temperature, diluted with 50mL CH 2 C1 2 and saturated NaHCO 3 , exfracted (3 x 10%
  • Step d l-[4-(4-Acetyl-benzenesulfonyl)-3-(R )-methyl-piperazin-l-ylmethyl]- cyclopropanecarbonitrile.
  • the residue obtained above in 20 mL CH 2 C1 2 was combined in a flask with 1.88 g 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (8.64 mmol) and 1.75 g triethylamine (17.3 mmol).
  • the solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by dilution with 20 mL CH 2 C1 2 and saturated NaHCO 3 .
  • the aqueous solution was exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH 2 Ci2).
  • the organics were dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (Si ⁇ 2 , 1% MeOH/CH 2 Cl2) provided the product as a colorless oil (1.98 g, 5.48mmol).
  • Step e l- ⁇ 3-(J? )-Methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl ⁇ -cyclopropanecarbonitrile.
  • a 100 mL flask containing product obtained above (1.98 g, 5.48 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was charged with 22 mL TMS-CF 3 (0.5M in THF, 11 mmol, 2.0 equiv.).
  • Step f l- ⁇ 3-(R )-Methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl ⁇ -cyclopropanecarboxylic acid amide (15).
  • Step g. (S)-2-(4-((R)-4-((l-Cyanocyclopropyl) methyl)-2-methyIpiperazin-l- ylsulfonyI)phenyl)-l,l,l-trifluoropropan-2-yl (S)-l-hydroxybutan-2-ylcarbamate.
  • Step h l-(((R)-3-Methyl-4-(4-((S)-l,l,l-rifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2- yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin-l-yl)methyl)cyclopropanecarboxamide (15b).
  • Step i The diastereoisomers were resolved by HPLC. Flow rate 22 mL/min on a Chiralpak AD 20 mm i.d. x 250 mm 10 micron column (Daciel Chemical Industries Ltd), using isopropyl alcohol/hexanes (30/70) as the eluent. The first peak was collected to yield 1 -(((R)-3-methyl-4-(4-((S)- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin-l - yl)methyl)cyclopro ⁇ anecarboxamide (15b).
  • Step a 4-(l-Chloromethyl-cyclopropyl)-pyridine.
  • a 50 mL flask containing 200 mg of (l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropyl)-methanol (1.34mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 10 mL CH 2 C1 2 was added 174 mg thionyl chloride (1.48mmol, 1.1 equiv.). After stirring for 1 h, the solution was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the product as a brown solid.
  • Step b 2-[l-Benzyl-4-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl)-piperazin-2-yl]- ethanol.
  • a 250 mL flask was charged with the product obtained above (1.34 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), 2-(l-benzyl-piperazin-2-yl)-ethanol (1.18 g, 5.36 mmol, 4.0 equiv.), and 10 mL acetonitrile.
  • the flask was equipped with a reflux condenser, and then placed into a preheated 100 °C bath.
  • Step c 2-[4-(l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl)-piperazin-2-yl]-ethanol.
  • To a 100 mL flask was charged with 500 mg 5% Pd/C and 30mL EtOH under N 2 .
  • the product obtained above (0.88 mmol) was then added followed by 10 mL cyclohexene.
  • the flask was equipped with a reflux condenser, and then placed into a preheated 80 °C bath. After stirring for 2 h, the solution was hot filtered through a plug of celite.
  • the celite plug was washed (3 x EtOH), and the combined EtOH fractions were concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide the product as a colorless oil.
  • Step d l- ⁇ 4-[2-(2-HydroxyethyI)-4-(l-pyridin-4-yI-cyclopropylmethyl)- piperazine-l-sulfonyl] ⁇ phenyl ⁇ -ethanone.
  • the product obtained above 0.88 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 5 mL CH 2 C1 2 was combined in a flask with 193 mg 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (0.88mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 178 mg triethylamine (1.76 mmol, 2.0 equiv.).
  • a 100 mL flask containing a portion of product obtained above 26 mg, 0.059 mmol, 1.0 equiv.
  • TMS-CF 3 0.5M in THF
  • the solution was allowed to stir for 0.5 h followed by addition of 0.5 mL tetrabutylammonium fluoride(l .0M in THF).
  • Step a A mixture of 1-aminocyclopropane-l-carboxylic acid methyl ester hydrochloride (1.0 g, 6.60 mmol) in H 2 O (4 mL), phosphoric acid (85 wt. % in water, 0.2 mL), glyoxal (40 wt.% in water, 0.76 mL, 6.60 mmol) and formaldehyde (37 wt.% in water, 0.50 mL, 6.60 mmol) was warmed and stirred in a 90 °C oil bath. To the mixture NH 4 C1 (354 mg, 6.60 mmol) in H 2 O (3 mL) was added dropwise. The stirring was continued for lh.
  • the viscous solution was allowed to cool to room temperature and stirred for lh.
  • the mixture was cooled to 0 °C and KOH (3N) was added dropwise to neutralize the solution to pH 7.
  • the mixture was concenfrated and dried in vacuo. The obtained dry mixture was patiented to a reduction with LAH.
  • Step b To the product obtained from the above reaction in THF (20 mL) LAH (1.0 M in THF, 13.2 mL, 13.2 mmol) was added dropwise at 0 °C. The ice- water bath was removed and stirring was continued at room temperature for 4 h. The solution was allowed to cool to 0 °C and H 2 O (0.4 mL), NaOH (15 wt. % in water, 0.4 mL) and H 2 O (1.2 mL) were added sequentially. The cold bath was removed, stirring was continued for 15min. The mixture was then filtered through a pad of Celite, using THF as a rinse. Evaporation ofthe combined filtrates in vacuo, and flash chromatography ofthe residue, using 1.5:8.5:0.05 MeOH-CH 2 Cl 2 -NH OH, provided 0.23 g product.
  • Step c To a solution ofthe alcohol (0.23 g, 1.66 mmol) in CH 2 C1 2 , SOCl 2 ( 0.24 mL, 3.32 mmol) was added dropwise. Stirring at room temperature was continued for 14 h. Evaporation ofthe solvent and the remaining SOCl 2 in vacuo and trituration in EtOAc provided the chloride (195mg, HC1 salt).
  • Step d A mixture of (R)-(-)-2-methyl ⁇ iperazine (348 mg, 3.48 mmol) and the chloride (195 mg, 0.99 mmol) was heated and stirred in a 100 °C oil bath for 5 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and dissolved in CH 2 C1 2 (3mL). Flash chromatography ofthe solution, using 1.5:8.5:0.05 MeOH-CH 2 Cl 2 -NH 4 OH, provided the coupling product (123 mg).
  • Step e A mixture ofthe coupling product from step d (105.4mg, 0.48 mmol), acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (105mg, 0.53 mmol), NEt 3 (O.lmL, 0.58 mmol) in CH 2 C1 2 was stirred at room temperature for 14 h. Evaporation ofthe solvent in v ⁇ cuo, and flash chromatography ofthe residue, using 1 :9:0.05 MeOH-CH 2 Cl 2 -NH 4 OH, provided the sulfonamide (0.17 g).
  • Step f To a mixture ofthe sulfonamide (0.17g, 0.42 mmol) and CF 3 SiMe 3 (0.5M in THF, 2.6 mL, 1.3 mmol) TBAF (1.0 M, 1.3 mL, 1.3 mmol) was added at room temperature. The mixture was stirred for 20 h, diluted with Et 2 O (20 mL). The solution was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 , and brine, dried, and concenfrated. Flash chromatography ofthe residue, using 0.5:9.5 MeOH-CH 2 Cl 2 , provided Compound 17 (125mg).
  • the flow rate was 20mL/min on a Chiralcel AD- H 20mm I.D.x250mm, 5 micron column (Daciel chemical Industries LTD), using isopropyl alcohol/hexanes (8:92) as an eluent.
  • the first peak was collected as 28b.
  • the 11/3-HSDl inhibitory activity was examined by quantitative determination by an SPA (scintillation proximity assay) system ofthe suppressive action on the conversion from cortisone to cortisol using human 11/3-HSDl (hereinafter recombinant 11/3-HSDl) expressed using a baculo-virus system as an enzyme source.
  • SPA sintillation proximity assay
  • a reagent was added to a 96 well plate (96 well Opti-platesTM-96 (Packard)) to the following final concenfration and a volume of 100 ⁇ l was reacted at room temperature for 90 min.
  • reaction solution used was 0.1 ⁇ g/ml recombinant 11/3-HSDl, 500 ⁇ M NADPH, 16 nM 3 H cortisone (Amersham Biosciences, 1.78 Tbq/mol) dissolved in 0.1% BSA (Sigma)-containing PBS and the test drug was 2 ⁇ l of a compound solution (dissolved in DMSO).
  • the reaction was stopped by adding PBS (40 ⁇ l, containing 0.1% BSA (Sigma)) containing 0.08 ⁇ g of anti-cortisol mouse monoclonal antibody (East Coast Biologies), 365 ⁇ g SPA PVT mouse antibody-binding beads (Amersham Biosciences) and 175 ⁇ M carbenoxolone (Sigma) to the reaction solution. After the completion ofthe reaction, the plate was incubated overnight at room temperature and the radioactivity was measured by Topcount (Packard).
  • the value (0% inhibition) ofthe well containing 2 ⁇ l of DMSO instead ofthe test drug was used, and for positive control, the value (100% inhibition) ofthe well containing carbenoxolone instead ofthe test drug at the final concenfration of 50 ⁇ M was used.
  • the inhibition (%) ofthe test drug was calculated by ((value of control - value of test drug)/(value of control - value of positive control)) x 100 (%).
  • the IC 5 o value was analyzed using a computer-based curve fitting soft.
  • Recombinant human, mouse and rat 11/3-HSDl were expressed in baculovirus expression system, isolated by affinity purification and used as the enzyme sources for cortisone to cortisol conversion in vitro.
  • H-Cortisone (Amersham Bioscience, 1.78 Tbq/mol. 49 Ci/mmol) was used as the substrate, and a monoclonal anti-cortisol antibody and the scintillation proximity assay (SPA) system were used to detect the product ofthe 11/3-HSD1- catalyzed reaction, 3 H-cortisol. Reactions took place at room temperature for 90 min.
  • SPA scintillation proximity assay
  • Opti-platesTM-96 (Packard) in 100 ⁇ L volume with 2 ⁇ L test compounds or control in DMSO, 0.1 ⁇ g/mL 11/3-HSDl protein, 500 ⁇ M NADPH and 16 nM radioactive cortisone, in PBS buffer supplemented with 0.1% BSA (Sigma). Reaction was stopped with the addition of 40 ⁇ L buffer containing 0.08 ⁇ g anti-cortisol monoclonal antibody (East Coast Biologies), 365 ⁇ g SPA PVT antibody-binding beads (Amersham Biosciences) and 175 ⁇ M carbenoxolone (Sigma).
  • This cell-based assay measures the conversion of 3 H-cortisone to 3 H-cortisol in a HEK-293 cell line stably overexpressing human recombinant 11/3-HSDl .
  • HEK-293 cells were grown in DMEM/F12 supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, and plated onto poly- D-lysine-coated 96-well assay plates (Costar 3903), 100,000 cells per well in 50 ⁇ L assay media (phenol free DMEM/F12 (frivifrogen) + 0.2% BSA + 1% antibiotic-antimycotic solutions).
  • the solution was incubated at 37 °C for 24 h, and the reaction was initiated by the addition of 25 ⁇ L of assay media containing compounds of desired concentration and 25 ⁇ L of assay media containing 40 nM of 3 H-cortisone to each well.
  • the reaction mixture was incubated at 37 °C for 90 min. and the reaction terminated by the addition of 25 ⁇ L of assay media containing 0.2 ⁇ g of anti-cortisol monoclonal antibody (East Coast Biologies), 500 ⁇ g SPA PVT antibody-binding beads (Amersham Biosciences) and 500 ⁇ M carbenoxolone (Sigma).
  • Plates were incubated at room temperature for at least 2 h before being read on Topcount (Packard). The point of 50% inhibition of 11 / 3-HSDl enzyme activity (IC 50 ) was determined by computer-based curve fitting.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Child & Adolescent Psychology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds having the formula: (I); and prodrugs or pharmaceutically acceptable salts or prodrugs thereof. The Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds are useful for treating diabetes, obesity, and other diseases and disorders.

Description

ARYL SULFONAMIDE COMPOUNDS AND USES RELATED THERETO
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS [0001] This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/531,924, filed December 22, 2003, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
STATEMENT AS TO RIGHTS TO INVENTIONS MADE UNDER FEDERALLY SPONSORED RESEARCH OR DEVELOPMENT
[0002] Not Applicable.
REFERENCE TO A "SEQUENCE LISTING," A TABLE, OR A COMPUTER PROGRAM LISTING APPENDIX SUBMITTED ON A COMPACT DISK. [0003] Not Applicable.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION [0004] This invention is generally directed to novel compounds, compositions, and the use of either in methods for modulating hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, such as 11/3-HSD1, and for treating or preventing diseases associated with the modulation of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, such as diabetes and obesity. The methods comprise the administration, to a patient in need thereof, of a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound. Novel Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, stereoisomers, or prodrugs thereof are presented herein.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
[0005] Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (HSDs) regulate the occupancy and activation of steroid hormone receptors by converting steroid hoπnones into their inactive metabolites. For a recent review, see Nobel et al., Eur. J. Biochem. 2001, 268:4113-4125.
[0006] There exist numerous classes of HSDs. The 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (11 β -HSDs) catalyze the interconversion of active glucocorticoids (such as cortisol and corticosterone), and their inert forms (such as cortisone and 11- dehydrocorticosterone). The isoform 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 (11/3- HSD1) is expressed in liver, adipose tissue, brain, lung and other glucocorticoid tissue and is a potential target for therapy directed at numerous disorders that may be ameliorated by reduction of glucocorticoid action, such as diabetes, obesity and age-related cognitive dysfunction. Seckl, et al., Endocrinology, 2001, 142:1371-1376.
[0007] It is well known that glucocorticoids play a central role in the development of diabetes and that glucocorticoids enable the effect of glucagon on the liver. Long et al., J. Exp. Med. 1936, 63: 465-490; and Houssay, Endocrinology 1942, 30: 884-892. In addition, it has been well substantiated that 1 lβ-HSDl plays an important role in the regulation of local glucocorticoid effect and of glucose production in the liver. Jamieson et al., J. Endocrinol. 2000, 165:685-692. In Walker, et al., J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 1995, 80:3155-3159, it was reported that the administration ofthe non-specific 11/3-HSD1 inhibitor carbenoxolone resulted in improved hepatic insulin sensitivity in humans.
[0008] Furthermore, the hypothesized mechanism of action of HSDs in the treatment of diabetes has been supported by various experiments conducted in mice and rats. These studies showed that the mRNA levels and activities of two key enzymes in hepatic glucose production, phosphoenolpyruvate carboxykinase (PEPCK), and glucose-6-phosphatase (G6Pase) were reduced upon administration of HSD inhibitors. In addition, blood glucose levels and hepatic glucose production were shown to be reduced in 11/3-HSD1 knockout mice. Additional data gathered using this murine knockout model also confirm that inhibition of 1 l -HSDl will not cause hypoglycemia, since the basal levels of PEPCK and G6Pase are regulated independently of glucocorticoids. Kotelevtsev et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 1997, 94: 14924-14929.
[0009] HSDs are also believed to play a role in obesity. Obesity is an important factor in Syndrome X as well as type II (non-insulin dependent) diabetes, and omental fat appears to be of central importance in the development of both of these disease, as abdominal obesity has been linked with glucose intolerance, hyperinsulinemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and other factors of Syndrome X (e.g., raised blood pressure, decreased levels of HDL and increased levels of VLDL). Montague et al., Diabetes 2000, 49:883-888, 2000. It has also been reported that inhibition ofthe 11/3-HSDs in pre-adipocytes (stromal cells) resulted in a decreased rate of differentiation into adipocytes. This is predicted to result in diminished expansion (possibly reduction) ofthe omental fat depot, which may lead to reduced central obesity. Bujalska et al., Lancet 1997, 349:1210-1213.
[0010] Inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 in mature adipocytes is expected to attenuate secretion of the plasminogen activator inhibitor 1 (PAI-1), which is an independent cardiovascular risk factor, as reported in Halleux et al., J Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 1999, 84:4097-4105. In addition, a correlation has been shown to exist between between glucocorticoid activity and certain cardiovascular risk factors. This suggests that a reduction ofthe glucocorticoid effects would be beneficial in the treatment or prevention of certain cardiovascular diseases. Walker et al, Hypertension 1998, 31:891-895; and Fraser et al., Hypertension 1999, 33:1364- 1368.
[0011] HSDs have also been implicated in the process of appetite control and therefore is believed to play an additional role in weight-related disorders. It is known that adrenalectomy attenuates the effect of fasting to increase both food intake and hypothalamic neuropeptide Y expression. This suggests that glucocorticoids play a role in promoting food intake and that inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 in the brain may increase satiety, thus resulting in a decreased food intake. Woods et al., Sct'ercce 1998, 280:1378-1383.
[0012] Another possible therapeutic effect associated with modulation of HSDs is that which is related to various pancreatic aliments. It is reported that inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 in murine pancreatic /3-cells results in increased insulin secretion. Davani et al., J. Biol. Chem. 2000, 275:34841-34844. This follows from the preceding discovery that glucocorticoids were previously found to be responsible for reduced pancreatic insulin release in vivo Billaudel et al., Horm. Metab. Res. 1979, 11:555-560. Thus, it is suggested that inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 would yield other beneficial effects in the treatment of diabetes other than the predicted effects on the liver and of fat reduction.
[0013] 11/3-HSD1 also regulates glucocorticoid activity in the brain and thus contributes to neurotoxicity. Rajan et al., Neuroscience 1996, 16:65-70; and Seckl et al., Neuroendocrinol. 2000, 18:49-99. Stress and/or glucocorticoids are known to influence cognitive function (de Quervain et al, Nature 1998, 394:787-790), and unpublished results indicate significant memory improvement in rats treated with a non-specific 11/3-HSD inhibitors. These reports, in addition to the known effects of glucocorticoids in the brain, suggest that inhibiting HSDs in the brain may have a positive therapeutic effect against anxiety and related conditions. Tranche et al., Nature Genetics 1999, 23:99-103. 11/3-HSD1 reactivates 11-DHC to corticosterone in hippocampal cells and can potentiate kinase neurotoxicity, resulting in age- related learning impairments. Therefore, selective inhibitors of 1 l -HSDl are believed to protect against hippocampal function decline with age. Yau et al., Proc Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 2001, 98:4716-4721. Thus, it has been hypothesized that inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 in the human brain would protect against deleterious glucocorticoid-mediated effects on neuronal function, such as cognitive impairment, depression, and increased appetite.
[0014] HSDs are believed to play a role in immunomodulation based on the general perception that glucocorticoids suppress the immune system. There is known to be a dynamic interaction between the immune system and the HPA (hypothalamopituitary- adrenal) axis (Rook, Baillier's Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 2000, 13: 576-581), and glucocorticoids help balance between cell-mediated responses and humoral responses. Increased glucocorticoid activity, which may be induced by stress, is associated with a humoral response and as such, the inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 may result in shifting the response towards a cell-based reaction. In certain disease states, such as tuberculosis, leprosy, and psoriasis, the immune reaction is typically biased towards a humoral response when a cell- based response might be more appropriate. Inhibition of 11/3-HSD1 is being studied for use to direct a cell-based response in these instances. Mason, Immunology Today 1991, 12:57-60. It follows then, that an alternative utility of 11/3-HSD1 inhibition would be to bolster a temporal immune response in association with immunization to ensure that a cell based response would be obtained.
[0015] Recent reports suggest that the levels of glucocorticoid target receptors and of HSDs are connected with the risks of developing glaucoma. Stokes et al., Invest. Ophthalmol. 2000, 41:1629-1638. Further, a connection between inhibition of 11 /3-HSD1 and a lowering ofthe intraocular pressure was recently reported. Walker et al., poster P3-698 at the Endocrine society meeting June 12-15, 1999, San Diego. It was shown that administration ofthe nonspecific 11/3-HSD1 inhibitor, carbenoxolone, resulted in the reduction ofthe intraocular pressure by 20% in normal patients. In the eye, 11/3-HSD1 is expressed exclusively in the basal cells ofthe corneal epithelium, the non-pigmented epithelialium ofthe cornea (the site of aqueous production), ciliary muscle, and the sphincter and dilator muscles ofthe iris. In confrast, the distant isoenzyme 1 l -hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 2 ("11/3-HSD2") is highly expressed in the non-pigmented ciliary epithelium and corneal endothelium. No HSDs have been found at the trabecular meshwork, which is the site of drainage. Therefore, 1 l -HSDl is suggested to have a role in aqueous production. [0016] Glucocorticoids also play an essential role in skeletal development and function but are detrimental to such development and function when present in excess. Glucocorticoid- induced bone loss is partially derived from suppression of osteoblast proliferation and collagen synthesis, as reported in Kim et al., J. Endocrinol. 1999, 162:371 379. It has been reported that the detrimental effects of glucocorticoids on bone nodule formation can be lessened by adminisfration of carbenoxolone, which is a non-specific 11/3-HSDl inhibitor. Bellows et al., Bone 1998, 23:119-125. Additional reports suggest that 11/3-HSD1 maybe responsible for providing increased levels of active glucocorticoid in osteoclasts, and thus in augmenting bone resorption. Cooper et al., Bone 2000, 27:375-381. This data suggests that inhibition of 11/3-HSDl may have beneficial effects against osteoporosis via one or more mechanisms which may act in parallel.
[0017] It is known that bile acids inhibit 11/3-HSD2 and that such inhibition results in a shift in the cortisol/cortisone equilibrium in the favor of cortisol. Quatfropani et al, J. Clin. Invest. Nov. 2001, 108:1299-305. A reduction in the hepatic activity of 11/3-HSD2 is therefore predicted to reverse the cortisol/cortisone equilibrium to favor cortisone, which could provide therapeutic benefit in diseases such as hypertension.
[0018] The various isozymes ofthe 17-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (17/3-HSDs) bind to androgen receptors or estrogen receptors and catalyze the interconversion of various sex hormones including esfradiol/estrone and testosterone/androstenedione. To date, six isozymes have been identifed in humans and are expressed in various human tissues including endometrial tissue, breast tissue, colon tissue, and in the testes. 17-beta- hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 2 (17/3-HSD2) is expressed in human endometrium and it's activity has been reported to be linked to cervical cancer. Kitawaki et al., J Clin. Endocrin. Metab., 2000, 85:1371-3292-3296. 17-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 3 (17/3-HSD3) is expressed in the testes and it's modulation may be useful for the freatment of androgen-related disorders.
[0019] Androgens and estrogens are active in their 17/3-hydroxy configurations, whereas their 17-keto derivatives do not bind to androgen and estrogen receptors and are thus inactive. The conversion between the active and inactive forms (esfradiol/estrone and testosterone/androstenedione) of sex hormones is catlyzed by members ofthe 17/3-HSD family. 17/3-HSD 1 catalyzes the formation of estradiol in breast tissue, which is important for the growth of malignant breast tumors. Labrie et al., Mol. Cell. Endocrinol. 1991, 78:C113- CI 18. A similar role has been suggested for 17/3-HSD4 in colon cancer. English et al., J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 1999, 84:2080-2085. 17/3-HSD3 is almost exclusively expressed in the testes and converts androstenedione into testosterone. Deficiency of this enzyme during fetal develoment leads to male pseudohermaphroditism. Geissler et al., Nat. Genet. 1994, 7:34-39. Both 17/3-HSD3 and various 3α-HSD isozymes are involved in complex metabolic pathways which lead to androgen shuffles between inactive and active forms. Penning et al., Biochem. J. 2000, 351:67-77. Thus, modulation of certain HSDs can have potentially beneficial effects in the freatment of androgen- and estrogen-related disorders.
[0020] The 20-alpha-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (20α-HSDs) catalyze the interconversion of progestins (such as between progesterone and 20α-hydroxy progesterone). Other substrates for 20α-HSDs include 17o;-hydroxypregnenolone or 17α- hydroxyprogesterone, leading to 20α-OH steroids. Several 20o!-HSD isoforms have been identified and 20α-HSDs are expressed in various tissues, including the placenta, ovaries, testes and adrenals. Peltoketo, et al., J. Mol. Endocrinol. 1999, 23:1-11.
[0021] The 3-alpha-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (3α-HSDs) catalyze the interconversion ofthe androgens dihydrotestosterone (DHT) and 5α-androstane-3o 17/3-diol and the interconversion ofthe androgens DHEA and androstenedione and therefore play an important role in androgen metabolism. Ge et al., Biology of Reproduction 1999, 60:855- 860.
[0022] Aryl sulfonamide compounds and methods for their synthesis are disclosed in Klioze et al., J. Med. Chem. 1980, 23:677-679, and International Publication No. WO 01/02371. The disclosure of these publications, however, does not however encompass the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe present invention nor the use ofthe disclosed compounds as HSD modulators.
[0023] International Publications Nos. WO 01/90090, WO 01/90091, WO 01/90092, and WO 03/044009 disclose aryl sulfonamides and their use as 11/3-HSDl modulators, but the disclosures of these publications do not encompass the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe present invention or their uses as HSD modulators.
[0024] Despite the previous research done in the field of HSD inhibition, there remains a need for novel compounds that are potent inhibitors ofthe various families of HSDs and efficacious for the freatment of HSD-mediated conditions such as diabetes, obesity, glaucoma, osteoporosis, cognitive disorders, immune disorders, depression, hypertension, and others.
[0025] The citation of any reference in this application is not an admission that the reference is prior art to this application.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0026] In brief, the present invention relates to novel compounds, compositions thereof and methods for modulating the activity of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (HSDs), such as 11/3- hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, 17/3-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, 20α-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, and 3α-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, including all isoforms thereof, including but not limted to 11/3-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 (hereinafter "11/3- HSDl"), 11/3-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 2 (hereinafter "11/3-HSD2"), and 17/3- hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 3 (hereinafter "17/3-HSD3"). In a preferred embodiment, the components ofthe invention inhibit HSD activity.
[0027] The present invention also relates to methods for treating or preventing diseases or disorders associated with the action of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, stereoisomer, or prodrug thereof. The invention encompasses both selective and non-selective inhibitors of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases.
[0028] It should be understood that selective and non-selective inhibitors of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases each have benefits in the treatment or prevention of diseases associated with, for example, abnormal glucose levels or hypothalamic function. Two types of selectivity are contemplated, that with respect to selectivity for HSDs as a class over other types of receptors or gene targets related to glucose metabolism, or those which are selective for various HSDs or specific isoforms thereof compared to other HSDs or specific isoforms thereof.
[0029] In one embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can act as selective or non- selective 11/3-HSD inhibitors. The compounds may inhibit the interconversion of inactive 11-keto steroids with their active hydroxy equivalents. Thus, the present invention provides methods by which the conversion ofthe inactive form to the active form may be controlled, and useful therapeutic effects maybe obtained as a result of such control. More specifically, but not exclusively, the invention is concerned with interconversion between cortisone and cortisol in humans.
[0030] In another embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can act as 11/3-HSD inhibitors in vivo. [0031] In another embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe present invention may be orally active.
[0032] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds are also useful for modulation of numerous metabolic functions including, but not limited to, one or more of: (i) regulation of carbohydrate metabolism, (ii) regulation of protein metabolism, (iii) regulation of lipid metabolism, (iv) regulation of normal growth and/or development, (v) influence on cognitive function, (vi) resistance to stress and mineralocorticoid activity.
[0033] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds may also be useful for inhibiting hepatic gluconeogenesis, and may also be effective to relieve the effects of endogenous glucocorticoids in diabetes mellitus, obesity (including entripetal obesity), neuronal loss and/or the cognitive impairment of old age. Thus, in a further aspect, the invention provides the use of an inhibitor of HSDs in methods directed to producing one or more therapeutic effects in a patient to whom the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound is administered, said therapeutic effects selected from inhibition of hepatic gluconeogenesis, an increase in insulin sensitivity in adipose tissue and muscle, and the prevention of or reduction in neuronal loss/cognitive impairment due to glucocorticoid-potentiated neurotoxicity or neural dysfunction or damage.
[0034] The invention further provides methods for treating treatment a condition selected from the group consisting of: hepatic insulin resistance, adipose tissue insulin resistance, muscle insulin resistance, neuronal loss or dysfunction due to glucocorticoid potentiated neurotoxicity, and any combination ofthe aforementioned conditions, the methods comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
[0035] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe invention include compounds having Formula (I):
Figure imgf000010_0001
(I) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, stereoisomers, or prodrugs thereof, wherein R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from -H, -halo, -OH, -CN, -NO2, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, - heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl and -aryl, and at least one of R1, R2 and R3 is other than -H; R4 is selected from -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, - -Cs alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -C2-C8 hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, - heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(d-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -C(O)R', -C(O)OR', -C(O)N(R)2, -C(0R')R', -OR', -SR', -
OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, and -NR'C(O)R'; R5 is selected from -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl,
-cycloalkyH -Cδ alkyl), -heterocycle-(Cι,-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-^! -C6 alkyl), -aryl-(Cι-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , -C(O)OR', -C(0)N(R)2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -
S(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, and -NR'C(O)R', or R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form an optionally substituted cycloalkane ring; R6 is selected from -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -Cι-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl,
-cycloalkyl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(CrC6 alkyl), -aryl-(CrC6 alkyl),-C(O)R , -C(O)OR', -C(O)N(R')2, -C(OR')R', -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(0)N(R')2, -
S(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, and -NR'C(O)R', or is combined with R5 as described above; R7 is selected from -H, -halo, -CN, -N02, amino and -d-Cs alkyl; and in some embodiments is in a position ortho to the sulfonamide moiety of formula I; Q is selected from the group consisting of -H, -halo, -CN, -NO , -Q-Cs alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, - heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(Cι-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , -C(0)O , -C(O)N(R')2, -C(OR') , -OR', -SR', - OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO R\ -SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, and -NR'C(O)R'; L1 is a direct bond, -Cι-C7 alkylene- or -d-C7 heteroalkylene-; L2 is a direct bond, -Cι-C alkylene- or -C1-C heteroalkylene-; and each occurrence of is is independently -H, -Cι-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, -alkoxyalkyl, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, - aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1-C alkyl), -heterocycle-(d-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(d-C6 alkyl), or -aryl- (Ci-Cδ alkyl), or two R groups, when attached to the same nitrogen atom, can be combined with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a heterocycle or heteroaryl group. wherein when R1, R2 and R3 are each -F or -CH3, R4 is other than -H; and said compound is other than
Figure imgf000011_0001
wherein Ra is selected from 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-chlorophenyl and 4-bromophenyl and Rb is 4-fluorophenyl or 4-bromophenyl.
[0036] In one aspect, the invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, carrier, excipient or diluent. [0037] In another aspect, the invention provides methods for freating insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus comprising admimstering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0038] In another aspect, the invention provides methods for freating non-insulin- dependent diabetes mellitus comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0039] In another aspect, the invention provides methods for treating insulin resistance comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0040] In another aspect, the invention provides methods for freating obesity comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0041] In another aspect, the invention provides methods for modulating cortisol production comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0042] In another aspect, the invention provides methods for modulating hepatic glucose production comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0043] In another aspect, the invention provides methods for modulating hypothalamic function comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0044] In one aspect, the invention provides methods for freating a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase-mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0045] In another aspect, the invention provides method for modulating the function of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase in a cell comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0046] In a further aspect, the invention provides methods for modulating a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase, comprising admimstering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I). [0047] hi still another aspect, the invention provides methods for treating an 11 /3-HSD 1 - mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0048] In yet another aspect, the invention provides method for modulating the function of 11/3-HSDl in a cell comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0049] In a further aspect, the invention provides methods for modulating 11 /3-HSD 1 , comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0050] In one aspect, the invention provides methods for freating an 1 l/3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I)..
[0051] In another aspect, the invention provides method for modulating the function of 11/3-HSD2 in a cell comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0052] In a further aspect, the invention provides methods for modulating 11/3-HSD2, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0053] In one aspect, the invention provides methods for treating an 17/3-HSD3 -mediated condition or disorder comprising admimstering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0054] In another aspect, the invention provides method for modulating the function of 17/3-HSD3 in a cell comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0055] In a further aspect, the invention provides methods for modulating 17/3-HSD3, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0056] These and other aspects of this invention will be evident upon reference to the following detailed description. To that end, certain patent and other documents are cited herein to more specifically set forth various aspects of this invention. Each of these documents are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS [0057] Not Applicable.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions and Abbreviations [0058] As used herein, the terms used above having following meaning:
[0059] The term "d-C6 alkyl" as used herein refers to a straight or branched chain, saturated hydrocarbon having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Representative d-C6 alkyl groups include, but are not limited to methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, and neohexyl. A -Cβ alkyl group can be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein below.
[0060] The term "d-C8 alkyl" as used herein refers to a straight or branched chain, saturated hydrocarbon having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Representative d-C8 alkyl groups include, but are not limited to methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, neohexyl, heptyl, isoheptyl, neoheptyl, octyl, isooctyl, and neooctyl. A d-C8 alkyl group can be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein below.
[0061] The term "C2-C8 alkenyl" as used herein refers to a straight or branched chain unsaturated hydrocarbon containing 2-8 carbon atoms and at least one double bond. Examples of a C2-C8 alkenyl group include, but are not limited to, ethylene, propylene, 1- butylene, 2-butylene, isobutylene, sec-butylene, 1-pentene, 2-pentene, isopentene, 1-hexene, 2-hexene, 3-hexene, isohexene, 1-heptene, 2-heptene, 3-heptene, isoheptene, 1-octene, 2- octene, 3-octene, 4-octene, and isooctene.
[0062] The term "C2-C8 alkynyl" as used herein refers to a straight or branched chain unsaturated hydrocarbon containing 2-8 carbon atoms and at least one triple bond. Examples of a C2-C8 alkynyl group include, but are not limited to, acetylene, propyne, 1-butyne, 2- butyne, isobutyne, sec-butyne, 1-pentyne, 2-pentyne, isopentyne, 1-hexyne, 2-hexyne, 3- hexyne, isohexyne, 1-heptyne, 2-heptyne, 3-heptyne, isoheptyne, 1-octyne, 2-octyne, 3- octyne, 4-octyne, and isooctyne.
[0063] The term "d-C alkylene" as used herein refers to a d-C7 alkyl group in which one of the d-C7 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a bond. Examples of a d- C7 alkylene include -CH2-, -CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2-, and -CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2-.
[0064] The term "d-C6 alkoxy" as used herein refers to a group having the formula -O- (d-C6 alkyl). Examples of a d-C6 alkoxy group include -O-methyl, -O-ethyl, -O-propyl, -O- isopropyl, -O-butyl, -O-sec-butyl, -O-tert-butyl, -O-pentyl, -O-isopentyl, -O-neopentyl, -O- hexyl, -O-isohexyl, and -O-neohexyl.
[0065] The term "aminoalkyl," as used herein, refers to a d-C6 alkyl group wherein from one or more ofthe d-C6 alkyl group's hydrogen atom is replaced with an amine of formula -N(Ra)2, wherein each occurrence of Ra is independently -H or d-C6 alkyl. Examples of aminoalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, -CH2NH , -CH CH NH , -CH2CH2CH2NH2, -CH2CH2CH2CH2NH2, -CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2NH2, -CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH NH , t-butylamine and isopropylamine.
[0066] The term "aryl" as used herein refers to a 6- to 14-membered monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic aromatic hydrocarbon ring system. Examples of an aryl group include phenyl and naphthyl. An aryl group can be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein below.
[0067] The terms "cycloalkyl" and "cycloalkane" are used interchangeably and refer to a 3- to 15-membered saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring system. Included in this class are cycloalkyl groups which are fused to a benzene ring and cycloalkyl groups which are spirocyclic, as well as spirocyclic and fused to a benzene ring. Representative cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, 1,3-cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptyl, cycloheptenyl, 1,3-cycloheptadienyl, 1,4- cycloheptadienyl, -1,3,5-cycloheptatrienyl, cyclooctyl, cyclooctenyl, 1,3-cyclooctadienyl, 1,4-cyclooctadienyl, -1,3,5-cyclooctatrienyl, decahydronaphthalene, octahydronaphthalene, hexahydronaphthalene, octahydroindene, hexahydroindene, tetrahydroinden, decahydrobenzocycloheptene, octahydrobenzocycloheptene, hexahydrobenzocycloheptene, tetranydrobenzocyclopήeptene, dodecahydroheptalene, decahydroheptalene, octahydroheptalene, hexahydroheptalene, and tefrahydroheptalene. A cycloalkyl group or cycloalkane ring can be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described below.
5 [0068] The term "halo" as used herein refers to -F, -CI, -Br or -I.
[0069] The term "haloalkyl," as used herein, refers to a d-C6 alkyl group wherein from one or more ofthe d-C6 alkyl group's hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen atom, which can be the same or different. Examples of haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 4-chlorobutyl, 3-bromopropyl, pentachloroethyl, and 10 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-bromo-2-chloroethyl.
[0070] The term "heteroalkyl," by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combinations thereof, consisting ofthe stated number of carbon atoms and from one to three heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, N, Si and S, wherein the nitrogen and
[ 5 sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized. The heteroatom(s) O, N and S may be placed at any interior position ofthe heteroalkyl group. The heteroatom Si may be placed at any position ofthe heteroalkyl group, including the position at which the alkyl group is attached to the remainder ofthe molecule. Examples include -CH2-CH2-O-CH3, -CH2-CH2-NH-CH3, -CH2-CH2-N(CH3)-CH3, -CH2-S-
:0 CH2-CH3, -CH2-CH2,-S(O)-CH3, -CH2-CH2-S(O)2-CH3, -CH=CH-O-CH3, -Si(CH3)3, -CH2- CH=N-OCH3, and -CH=CH-N(CH3)-CH3. Up to two heteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, for example, -CH2-NH-OCH3 and -CH2-O-Si(CH3)3.
[0071] The term "d-C7 heteroalkylene" as used herein, refers to a d-C alkylene in which one to three ofthe C1-C alkylene's -CH2- groups has been replaced by a sulfur atom, an 5 oxygen atom, or -NH-. A Cι-C7 heteroalkylene group can have a heteroatom at either or both of its termini.
[0072] The term "heteroaryl" as used herein refers to an aromatic heterocycle ring of 5 to 14 members and having at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, and containing at least 1 carbon atom, including monocyclic, bicyclic, and tricyclic ring 0 systems. Representative heteroaryls are triazolyl, tefrazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyridyl, furyl, benzofuranyl, thiophenyl, benzothiophenyl, quinolinyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, thiazolyl, benzothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, pyrimidyl, oxetanyl, azepinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dioxanyl, thietanyl and oxazolyl. A heteroaryl group can be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein below.
[0073] As used herein, the term "heteroatom" is meant to include oxygen (O), nifrogen (N), and sulfur (S).
[0074] As used herein, the term "heterocycle" as used herein refers to 5- to 14-membered ring systems which are either saturated, unsaturated, or aromatic, and which contains from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from nifrogen, oxygen and sulfur, and wherein the nifrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may be optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen heteroatom may be optionally quaternized, including, including monocyclic, bicyclic, and tricyclic ring systems. The bicyclic and tricyclic ring systems may encompass a heterocycle or heteroaryl fused to a benzene ring. The heterocycle may be attached via any heteroatom or carbon atom. Heterocycles include heteroaryls as defined above. Representative examples of heterocycles include, but are not limited to, aziridinyl, oxiranyl, thiiranyl, friazolyl, tefrazolyl, azirinyl, diaziridinyl, diazirinyl, oxaziridinyl, azetidinyl, azetidinonyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, pyrrolyl, oxazinyl, thiazinyl, diazinyl, triazinyl, tetrazinyl, imidazolyl, tefrazolyl, pyrrolidinyl, isoxazolyl, furanyl, furazanyl, pyridinyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, thiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, thiophenyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrimidinyl, benzimidazolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzodiazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, purinyl, indolyl, isoquinolinyl, quinolinyl, and quinazolinyl. A heterocycle group can be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents as described herein below.
[0075] The term "hydroxyalkyl," as used herein, refers to a Cι-C6 alkyl group wherein from one or more ofthe Cι-C6 alkyl group's hydrogen atom is replaced with an -OH group. Examples of hydroxyalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, -CH2OH, -CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH2CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OH, CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OH, t-butanol and isopropanol.
[0076] The term "C3-C8 hydroxyalkyl" as used herein, refers to a hydroxyalkyl group having from three to eight carbon atoms.
[0077] Substituents for the alkyl and heteroalkyl radicals (as well as those groups referred to as alkylene, alkenyl, heteroalkylene, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and heterocycloalkenyl) can be a variety of groups selected from: -OR', -NR'R", -SR', -halo, -SiR'R"R'", -OC(O)R', -C(O)R', -CO2R', -CONR'R", -OC(O)NR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -NR'"C(O)NR'R", -NR'"SO2NR'R", -NR"CO2R', -NHC(NH2)=NH, -NR'C(NH2)=NH, -NHC(NH2)=NR', -S(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2NR'R", -NR"SO2R', -CN and -NO2, in a number ranging from zero to three, with those groups having zero, one or two substituents being particularly preferred. R', R" and R'" each independently refer to hydrogen, unsubstituted (d-C8)alkyl or (d-C8)alkyl substituted with hydroxy, cyano or amino, unsubstituted hetero(C1-C8)alkyl, unsubstituted aryl and aryl substituted with one to three substituents selected from -halo, unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkoxy, unsubstituted thioalkoxy and unsubstituted aryl(d-C4)alkyl. When R' and R" are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nifrogen atom to form a 5-, 6- or 7- membered ring. For example, -NR'R" is meant to include 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl. Typically, an alkyl or heteroalkyl group will have from zero to three substituents, with those groups having two or fewer substituents being preferred in the present invention. More preferably, an alkyl or heteroalkyl radical will be unsubstituted or monosubstituted. Most preferably, an alkyl or heteroalkyl radical will be unsubstituted. From the above discussion of substituents, one of skill in the art will understand that the term "alkyl" is meant to include groups such as trihaloalkyl (e.g., -CF and -CH2CF3).
[0078] Preferred substituents for the alkyl and heteroalkyl radicals are selected from: -OR', -NR'R", -SR', -halo, -SiR'R"R'", -OC(O)R', -C(0)R', -CO2R', -C(O)NR'R",
-OC(O)NR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -NR"CO2R', -NR'"SO2NR'R", -S(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2NR'R", -NR"SO2R', -CN and -NO2, where R', R" and R'" are as defined above. Further preferred substituents are selected from: -OR', -NR'R", -halo, -OC(O)R', -CO2R', -C(O)NR'R", -OC(O)NR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -NR"CO2R', -NR'"SO2NR'R", -SO2R', -SO2NR'R", -NR"SO2R' -CN and -NO2.
[0079] Similarly, substituents for the aryl and heteroaryl groups are varied and selected from: -halo, -OR', -OC(O)R', -NR'R", -SR', -R', -CN, -NO2, -CO2R', -C(O)NR'R", -C(O)R', -OC(O)NR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -NR"CO2R', -NR"'C(0)NR'R", -NR'"SO2NR'R", -NHC(NH2)=NH, -NR'C(NH2)=NH, -NH-C(NH2)=NR', -S(O)R', -S02R', -SO2NR'R", -NR"SO2R', -N3, -CH(Ph)2, perfluoroalkoxy, perfluoro(C1-C4)alkyl, cyano(Cι-C4)alkyl, hydroxy(d-C )alkyl, and amino(Cι-C4)alkyl, in a number ranging from zero to the total number of open valences on the aromatic ring system; and where R', R" and R'" are independently selected from hydrogen, unsubstituted (d-C8)alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, unsubstituted hetero(d-Cg)alkyl, unsubstituted aryl, unsubstituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted aryl(d-C4)alkyl and unsubstituted aryloxy(Cι-C )alkyl. Typically, an aryl or heteroaryl group will have from zero to three substituents, with those groups having two or fewer substituents being preferred in the present invention. In one embodiment ofthe invention, an aryl or heteroaryl group will be unsubstituted or monosubstituted. In another embodiment, an aryl or heteroaryl group will be unsubstituted.
[0080] Preferred substituents for aryl and heteroaryl groups are selected from: -halo, -OR', -OC(O)R', -NR'R", -SR', -R', -CN, -N02, -CO2R', -CONR'R", -C(O)R', -OC(0)NR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -S(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2NR'R", -NR"SO2R', -N3, -CH(Ph)2, perfluoroalkoxy and perfluoro(d-C4)alkyl, where R' and R" are as defined above. Further preferred substituents are selected from: -halo, -OR', -OC(0)R', -NR'R", -R', -CN, -NO2, -CO2R', -CONR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2NR'R", -NR"SO2R', perfluoroalkoxy and perfluoro(d-C4)alkyl.
[0081] Two ofthe substituents on adjacent atoms ofthe aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula -T-C(O)-(CH2)q-U-, wherein T and U are independently -NH-, -O-, -CH2- or a single bond, and q is an integer of from 0 to 2. Alternatively, two ofthe substituents on adjacent atoms ofthe aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent ofthe formula -A-(CH2)r-B-, wherein A and B are independently -CH2-, -O-, -NH-, -S-, -S(O)-, -S(O)2-, -S(O)2NR'- or a single bond, and r is an integer of from 1 to 3. One ofthe single bonds ofthe new ring so formed may optionally be replaced with a double bond. Alternatively, two ofthe substituents on adjacent atoms ofthe aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent ofthe formula -(CH2)S- X-(CH )r, where s and t are independently integers of from 0 to 3, and X is -O-, -NR'-, -S-, - S(O)-, -S(O)2-, or -S(O)2NR'-. The substituent R' in -NR'- and -S(O)2NR'- is selected from hydrogen or unsubstituted (d-C6)alkyl.
[0082] It is to be understood that the substituent -CO2H, as used herein, may be optionally replaced with bioisosteric replacements such as:
Figure imgf000020_0001
0 II P^OH , % OH and the like. See, e.g., The Practice of Medicinal Chemistry; Wermuth, C.G., Ed.; Academic Press: New York, 1996; p. 203.
[0083] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can also exist in various isomeric forms, including configurational, geometric and conformational isomers, as well as existing in various tautomeric forms, particularly those that differ in the point of attachment of a hydrogen atom. As used herein, the term "isomer" is intended to encompass all isomeric forms of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, including tautomeric forms ofthe compound.
[0084] Certain Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds may have asymmetric centers and therefore exist in different enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms. An Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be in the form of an optical isomer or a diastereomer. Accordingly, the invention encompasses Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds and their uses as described herein in the form of their optical isomers, diasteriomers and mixtures thereof, including a racemic mixture.
Optical isomers ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can be obtained by known techniques such as asymmetric synthesis, chiral chromatography, simulated moving bed technology or via chemical separation of stereoisomers through the employment of optically active resolving agents.
[0085] As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the term "stereomerically pure compound" means one stereoisomer of a compound that is substantially free of other stereoisomers of that compound. For example, a stereomerically pure compound having one chiral center will be substantially free ofthe opposite enantiomer ofthe compound. A stereomerically pure a compound having two chiral centers will be substantially free of other diastereomers ofthe compound. A typical stereomerically pure compound comprises greater than about 80% by weight of one stereoisomer ofthe compound and less than about 20% by weight of other stereoisomers ofthe compound, more preferably greater than about 90% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 10% by weight of the other stereoisomers ofthe compound, even more preferably greater than about 95% by weight of one stereoisomer ofthe compound and less than about 5% by weight ofthe other stereoisomers ofthe compound, and most preferably greater than about 97% by weight of one stereoisomer ofthe compound and less than about 3% by weight ofthe other stereoisomers of the compound.
[0086] It should be noted that if there is a discrepancy between a depicted structure and a name given that structure, the depicted structure controls. In addition, if the stereochemistry of a structure or a portion of a structure is not indicated with, for example, bold or dashed lines, the structure or portion ofthe structure is to be interpreted as encompassing all stereoisomers of it.
[0087] An Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. Depending on the structure ofthe compound, the phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable salt," as used herein, refers to a pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic acid or base salt of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound. Representative pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, e.g., alkali metal salts, alkali earth salts, ammonium salts, water- soluble and water-insoluble salts, such as the acetate, amsonate (4,4-diaminostilbene-2, 2 - disulfonate), benzenesulfonate, benzonate, bicarbonate, bisulfate, bitarfrate, borate, bromide, butyrate, calcium, calcium edetate, camsylate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, clavulariate, dihydrochloride, edetate, edisylate, estolate, esylate, fiunarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycollylarsanilate, hexafluorophosphate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isothionate, lactate, lactobionate, laurate, malate, maleate, mandelate, mesylate, methylbromide, methylnifrate, methylsulfate, mucate, napsylate, nitrate, N-methylglucamine ammonium salt, 3-hydroxy-2-naphthoate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate (l,l-methene-bis-2-hydroxy-3-naphthoate, einbonate), pantothenate, phosphate/diphosphate, picrate, polygalacturonate, propionate, p-toluenesulfonate, salicylate, stearate, subacetate, succinate, sulfate, sulfosaliculate, suramate, tannate, tarfrate, teoclate, tosylate, triethiodide, and valerate salts. Furthermore, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt can have more than one charged atom in its structure. In this instance the pharmaceutically acceptable salt can have multiple counterions. Hence, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt can have one or more charged atoms and/or one or more counterions.
[0088] As used herein, the term "isolated and purified form" means that when isolated (e.g., from other components of a synthetic organic chemical reaction mixture), the isolate contains at least 30%, at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95% or at least 98% of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound by weight of the isolate. In one embodiment, the isolate contains at least 95% of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound by weight ofthe isolate.
[0089] As used herein, the term "prodrug" means a derivative of a compound that can hydrolyze, oxidize, or otherwise react under biological conditions (in vitro or in vivo) to provide an active compound, particularly an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, derivatives and metabolites of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound that include biohydrolyzable groups such as biohydrolyzable amides, biohydrolyzable esters, biohydrolyzable carbamates, biohydrolyzable carbonates, biohydrolyzable ureides, and biohydrolyzable phosphate analogues (e.g., monophosphate, diphosphate or triphosphate). Preferably, prodrugs of compounds with carboxyl functional groups are the lower alkyl esters ofthe carboxylic acid. The carboxylate esters are conveniently formed by esterifying any ofthe carboxylic acid moieties present on the molecule. Prodrugs can typically be prepared using well-known methods, such as those described by Burger 's Medicinal Chemistry and Drug Discovery 6 ed. (Donald J. Abraham ed., 2001, Wiley) and Design and Application of Prodrugs (H. Bundgaard ed., 1985, Harwood Academic Publishers Gmfh).
[0090] As used herein, the terms "treat", "treating" and "treatment" refer to the eradication or amelioration of a disease or symptoms associated with a disease. In certain embodiments, such terms refer to minimizing the spread or worsening ofthe disease resulting from the administration of one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents to a patient with such a disease. [0091] As used herein, the terms "prevent", "preventing" and "prevention" refer to the prevention ofthe onset, recurrence or spread ofthe disease in a patient resulting from the adminisfration of a prophylactic or therapeutic agent. [0092] The term "effective amount" as used herein refers to an amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound or other active ingredient sufficient to provide a therapeutic or prophylactic benefit in the freatment or prevention of a disease or to delay or minimize symptoms associated with a disease. Further, a therapeutically effective amount with respect to an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound means that amount of therapeutic agent alone, or in combination with other therapies, that provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or prevention of a disease. Used in connection with an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, the term can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids symptoms or causes of disease, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of or synergies with another therapeutic agent,
[0093] As used herein, "syndrome X" refers to a collection of abnormalities including hyperinsulinemia, obesity, elevated levels of triglycerides, uric acid, fibrinogen, small dense LDL particles and plasminogen activator inhibitor 1 (PAI-1), and decreased levels of HDL cholesterol. Syndrome X is further meant to include metabolic syndrome.
[0094] The terms "modulate", "modulation" and the like refer to the ability of a compound to increase or decrease the function, or activity of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase, for example, 11 (3-HSD 1. "Modulation", as used herein in its various forms, is intended to encompass inhibition, antagonism, partial antagonism, activation, agonism and/or partial agonism ofthe activity associated with a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase. Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors are compounds that, e.g., bind to, partially or totally block stimulation, decrease, prevent, delay activation, inactivate, desensitize, or down regulate signal transduction. Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase activators are compounds that, e.g., bind to, stimulate, increase, open, activate, facilitate, enhance activation, sensitize or up regulate signal transduction. The ability of a compound to modulate a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase can be demonstrated in an enzymatic assay or a cell-based assay. For example, the inhibition of 11/3-HSDl may decrease cortisol levels in a patient and/or increase cortisone levels in a patient by blocking the conversion of cortisone to cortisol. Alternatively, the inhibition of 11/3-HSD2 can increase cortisol levels in a patient and/or decrease cortisone levels in a patient by blocking the conversion of cortisol to cortisone.
[0095] A "patient" includes an animal (e.g., cow, horse, sheep, pig, chicken, turkey, quail, cat, dog, mouse, rat, rabbit or guinea pig), in one embodiment a mammal such as a non- primate and a primate (e.g., monkey and human), and in another embodiment a human. In a preferred embodiment, a patient is a human. In specific embodiments, the patient is a human infant, child, adolescent or adult.
[0096] The term "HSD" as used herein, refers to hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase enzymes in general, including, but not limited to, 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (1 lβ-HSDs), 17-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (17β-HSDs), 20-alpha-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (20α-HSDs), 3-alpha-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases (3α-HSDs), and all isoforms thereof.
[0097] The term "11/3-HSDl" as used herein, refers to the 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 enzyme, variant, or isoform thereof. 11/3-HSDl variants include proteins substantially homologous to native 11/3-HSDl, i.e., proteins having one or more naturally or non-naturally occurring amino acid deletions, insertions or substitutions (e.g., 11/3-HSDl derivatives, homologs and fragments). The amino acid sequence of a 11/3-HSDl variant preferably is at least about 80% identical to a native 11/3-HSDl, more preferably at least about 90% identical, and most preferably at least about 95% identical.
[0098] The term "11 /3-HSD2" as used herein, refers to the 11 -beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 2 enzyme, variant, or isoform thereof. 11 3-HSD2 variants include proteins substantially homologous to native 11/3-HSD2, i.e., proteins having one or more naturally or non-naturally occurring amino acid deletions, insertions or substitutions (e.g., 11/3-HSD2 derivatives, homologs and fragments). The amino acid sequence of a 11/3-HSD2 variant preferably is at least about 80% identical to a native 11/3-HSD2, more preferably at least about 90% identical, and most preferably at least about 95% identical, (see Bart et al, J. Med. Chem., 2002, 45:3813-3815).
[0099] The term "17/3-HSD3" as used herein, refers to the 17-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 3 enzyme, variant, or isoform thereof. 173-HSD3 variants include proteins substantially homologous to native 17/3-HSD3, i.e., proteins having one or more naturally or non-naturally occurring amino acid deletions, insertions or substitutions (e.g., 17/3-HSD3 derivatives, homologs and fragments). The amino acid sequence of a 17/3-HSD3 variant preferably is at least about 80% identical to a native 17/3-HSD3, more preferably at least about 90% identical, and most preferably at least about 95% identical.
[0100] As used herein, the term "HSD-responsive condition or disorder" and related terms and phrases refer to a condition or disorder that responds favorably to modulation of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase enzyme (HSD). Favorable responses to HSD modulation include alleviation or abrogation ofthe disease and/or its .attendant symptoms, inhibition of the disease, i.e., arrest or reduction ofthe development ofthe disease, or its clinical symptoms, and regression ofthe disease or its clinical symptoms. An HSD-responsive condition or disease may be completely or partially responsive to HSD modulation. An
HSD-responsive condition or disorder may be associated with inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, HSD activity and at least partially responsive to or affected by HSD modulation (e.g., an HSD inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients). Inappropriate HSD functional activity might arise as the result of HSD expression in cells which normally do not express HSD, decreased HSD expression or increased HSD expression. An HSD-responsive condition or disorder may include condition or disorder mediated by any HSD or isoform thereof.
[0101] As used herein, the term "11/3-HSDl -responsive condition or disorder" and related terms and phrases refer to a condition or disorder that responds favorably to modulation of 11/3-HSDl activity. Favorable responses to 11/3-HSDl modulation include alleviation or abrogation ofthe disease and/or its attendant symptoms, inhibition ofthe disease, i.e., arrest or reduction ofthe development ofthe disease, or its clinical symptoms, and regression ofthe disease or its clinical symptoms. An 11/3-HSDl -responsive condition or disease maybe completely or partially responsive to 11/3-HSDl modulation. An 11/3-HSDl -responsive condition or disorder may be associated with inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 11/3-HSDl activity and at least partially responsive to or affected by 11/3-HSDl modulation (e.g., a 11/3-HSDl inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients). Inappropriate 11/3-HSDl functional activity might arise as the result of 11/3-HSDl expression in cells which normally do not express 11/3-HSDl, decreased 11/3- HSDl expression or increased 11/3-HSDl expression. A 11/3-HSDl -responsive condition or disorder may include a 11 (3-HSD 1 -mediated condition or disorder.
[0102] As used herein, the term "1 l/3-HSD2-responsive condition or disorder" and related terms and phrases refer to a condition or disorder that responds favorably to modulation of 11/3-HSD2 activity. Favorable responses to 11/3-HSD2 modulation include alleviation or abrogation ofthe disease and/or its attendant symptoms, inhibition ofthe disease, i.e., arrest or reduction ofthe development ofthe disease, or its clinical symptoms, and regression ofthe disease or its clinical symptoms. An 1 l/3-HSD2-responsive condition or disease may be completely or partially responsive to 11/3-HSD2 modulation. An 1 l/3-HSD2-responsive condition or disorder may be associated with inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 11/3-HSD2 activity and at least partially responsive to or affected by 11/3-HSD2 modulation (e.g., a 11/3-HSD2 inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
[0103] As used herein, the term "17/3-HSD3 -responsive condition or disorder" and related terms and phrases refer to a condition or disorder that responds favorably to modulation of 17/3-HSD3 activity. Favorable responses to 17/3-HSD3 modulation include alleviation or abrogation ofthe disease and/or its attendant symptoms, inhibition ofthe disease, i.e., arrest or reduction ofthe development ofthe disease, or its clinical symptoms, and regression ofthe disease or its clinical symptoms. An 17/3-HSD3-responsive condition or disease may be completely or partially responsive to 17/3-HSD3 modulation. An 17/3-HSD3-responsive condition or disorder may be associated with inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 17/3-HSD3 activity and at least partially responsive to or affected by 17/3-HSD3 modulation (e.g., a 17/3-HSD3 inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients). Inappropriate 17/3-HSD3 functional activity might arise as the result of 17/3-HSD3 expression in cells which normally do not express 17/3-HSD3, decreased 17/3- HSD3 expression or increased 17/3-HSD3 expression. A 17/3-HSD3 -responsive condition or disorder may include a 17/3-HSD3-mediated condition or disorder.
[0104] As used herein, the term "HSD-mediated condition or disorder" and related terms and phrases refer to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, activity of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase (HSD). An HSD-mediated condition or disorder may be completely or partially characterized by inappropriate HSD activity. However, an HSD-mediated condition or disorder is one in which modulation of an HSD results in some effect on the underlying condition or disease (e.g., an HSD inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
[0105] As used herein, the term "11/3-HSDl -mediated condition or disorder" and related terms and phrases refer to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 11/3-HSDl activity. A 11/3-HSDl -mediated condition or disorder may be completely or partially characterized by inappropriate 11/3-HSDl activity. However, a 11/3-HSDl -mediated condition or disorder is one in which modulation of 11/3- HSDl results in some effect on the underlying condition or disease (e.g., a 11/3-HSDl inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients). [0106] As used herein, the term "1 l/3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder" and related terms and phrases refer to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 11/3-HSD2 activity. A 1 l/3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder may be completely or partially characterized by inappropriate 11/3-HSD2 activity. However, a 1 l/3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder is one in which modulation of 11/3- HSD2 results in some effect on the underlying condition or disease (e.g., a 11/3-HSD2 inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
[0107] As used herein, the term "17/3-HSD3 -mediated condition or disorder" and related terms and phrases refer to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, 17/3-HSD3 activity. A 17/3-HSD3-mediated condition or disorder may be completely or partially characterized by inappropriate 17/3-HSD3 activity. However, a 17/3-HSD3-mediated condition or disorder is one in which modulation of 17/3- HSD3 results in some effect on the underlying condition or disease (e.g., a 17/3-HSD3 inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
[0108] The following abbreviations are used herein and have the indicated definitions: ATP is adenosine triphosphate; t-BuOH is tert-butyl alcohol; CHO is Chinese hamster ovary; Dess- Martin Periodinane is l,l,l,-triacetoxy-l,l-dihyro-l,2-benziodoxol-3(lH)-one; DIBAL-Η is diisobutyl aluminum hydride; DMEM is Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium; DMF is N,N- dimethylformamide; Et3N is triethylamine; Et4NCN is tefraethylammonium cyanide; EtOAc is ethyl acetate; EtOΗ is ethanol; LAΗ is lithium aluminum hydride; LDA is lithium diisopropylamide; LiA^O'Bu^Η is lithium tri-tert-butoxyaluminohydride; MeOΗ is methanol; MS is mass spectrometry; MsCl is methanesulfonyl chloride; NaBΗ4 is sodium borohydride; NMR is nuclear magnetic resonance; PBS is phosphate-buffered saline; SPA is scintillaiton proximity assay; TBS is tert-butyldimethylsilyl; TBSCl is tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride; THF is tefrahydrofuran; TMS is trimethylsilyl.
THE ARYL SULFONAMIDE COMPOUNDS THE COMPOUNDS OFFORMULA (ϊ)
[0109] As stated above, the present invention encompasses Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds having the Formula (I):
Figure imgf000028_0001
0) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs or stereoisomers thereof, wherein: R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from -H, -halo, -OH, -CN, -NO2, -C C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, - heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl and -aryl, and at least one of R1, R2 and R3 is other than -H; R4 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -C2-C8 hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl- (d-C alkyl), -heterocycle-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C C6 alkyl), -aryl-(d-C6 alkyl), - C(O) , -C(O)OR , -C(O)N(R')2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', - SO2R', -S02N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R'; R5 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -CΪ-CS alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(d- C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(d-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(d-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(d-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , - C(O)OR , -C(O)N(R')2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', - SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R', or R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form an optionally substituted cycloalkane ring; R6 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(d- C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(d-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(d-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , - C(O)OR , -C(O)N(R')2, -C(OR')R , -OR , -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', - SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R'; R7 is selected from the group consisting of -H, -halo, -CN, -N02, amino and -d-C8 alkyl; and in some embodiments is in a position ortho to the sulfonamide moiety of formula I; Q is selected from the group consisting of -H, -halo, -CN, -N02, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, - heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(d-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(d-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C!-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(d-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , -C(O)OR', -C(O)N(R')2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', - OC(0)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R'; L1 is a direct bond, -d-C7 alkylene- or -d-C7 heteroalkylene-; L2 is a direct bond -d-C7 alkylene- or -Cι-C7 heteroalkylene-; each occurrence of is R is independently -H, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -alkoxyalkyl, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, - heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(Cι-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(d-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(d-C6 alkyl), or -aryl-(d-C6 alkyl), or two R groups, when attached to the same nitrogen atom, can be combined with the nifrogen atom to which they are attached to form a heterocycle or heteroaryl group; and wherein when R1, R2 and R3 are each -F or -CH3, R4 is other than -H; and • said compound is other than
Figure imgf000029_0001
wherein Ra is selected from 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-chlorophenyl and 4-bromophenyl and Rb is 4-fluorophenyl or 4-bromophenyl. [0110] A first subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L1 is -C1-C7 alkylene-, L2 is a direct bond, and R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring.
[0111] A second subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L1 is -d-C7 alkylene-, L2 is -C1-C7 alkylene-, and R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring.
[0112] A third subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L1 is -d-C7 alkylene-, L2 is a direct bond, and R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring, and Q is -aryl or -heteroaryl.
[0113] A fourth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L1 is -C1-C7 alkylene-, L2 is -C1-C7 alkylene-, and R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring, and Q is -aryl or -heteroaryl.
[0114] A fifth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L1 is -d-d alkylene-, L is a direct bond, and R and R , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring, and Q is -COOH or -C(O)NH .
[0115] A sixth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where 1 "7 1 f
L is -d-d alkylene-, L is -d-d alkylene-, and R and R , together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cycloalkane ring, and Q is -COOH or -C(O)NH2.
[0116] A seventh subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where R4 is -H , -alkyl or -C3-C6 hydroxyalkyl.
[0117] An eighth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where R^s -OH or -d-Cs alkyl.
[0118] A ninth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where R1 is -OH and R2 and R3 are independently -Ci-Cs alkyl, or -haloalkyl.
[0119] A tenth subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where R1, R2 and R3 are each -d-C8 alkyl.
[0120] An eleventh subclass ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) is that where L and L are each a direct bond, R and R together form a cycloalkane ring, and Q is -H. [0121] For each ofthe subclasses above wherein R5 and R6 together form a cycloalkane ring, the ring is optionally substituted with from one to three members selected from the substituents described above for "alkyl". Additionally, the cycloalkane ring can be substituted with (d-C8)alkyl, =O (and acetonide forms thereof), aryl (e.g., optionally substituted phenyl), heteroaryl (e.g., optionally substituted imidazolyl, triazolyl or pyridyl) and an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl (e.g., morpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl and piperidinyl). More preferably, the cycloalkane ring formed by joining R5 and R6 is substituted with from one to three members selected from unsubstituted (d-C8)alkyl, -OR', =O (and acetonide foπns thereof), -NR'R", -halo, -OC(O)R', -C(0)R', -CO2R', -CONR'R", -OC(O)NR'R", -NR"C(O)R', -NR"CO2R', -CN, -NO2, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl. R', R" and R'" each independently refer to hydrogen, unsubstituted (d-C8)alkyl or (d-C8)alkyl substituted with hydroxy, cyano or amino, unsubstituted hetero(C1-C8)alkyl, unsubstituted aryl and aryl substituted with one to three substituents selected from -halo, unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkoxy, unsubstituted thioalkoxy and unsubstituted aryl(Cι-C4)alkyl. Aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl groups directly attached to the cycloalkane ring are optionally substituted.
[0122] In a preferred embodiment, L1 is -CH2- and L2 is a direct bond.
[0123] In another preferred embodiment, L1 is a direct bond and L2 is -CH2-.
[0124] In another preferred embodiment, L1 and L2 are each -CH2-.
[0125] In still another preferred embodiment, L and L are each a direct bond.
[0126] In a preferred embodiment, Q is -aryl or -heteroaryl, optionally substituted with up to four groups independently chosen from -d-C8 alkyl, -halo, -C02R', C(O)N(R') and -CN.
[0127] In another preferred embodiment, Q is pyridyl.
[0128] In still another preferred embodiment, Q is imidazolyl.
[0129] In another preferred embodiment, Q is -COOH.
[0130] In still another preferred embodiment, Q is -C(O)NH2.
[0131] In yet another preferred embodiment, Q is -H.
[0132] In a preferred embodiment, R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cyclopropane ring. [0133] In another preferred embodiment, R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cyclobutane ring.
[0134] In yet another preferred embodiment, R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form a cyclopentane ring.
[0135] In a preferred embodiment, R4 is -H.
[0136] In yet another preferred embodiment, R4 is -CH3.
[0137] In another preferred embodiment, R4 is -CH2CH2OH.
[0138] In another preferred embodiment, R1 is -OH, R2 is -CH3, and R3 is CF3.
[0139] In still another preferred embodiment, R1 is -OH, R2 is -CF3, and R3 is CF3.
[0140] In one embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
Figure imgf000032_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, L1, L2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
[0141] hi one embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
Figure imgf000032_0002
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, L1, L2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (ϊ). [0142] In another embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
Figure imgf000033_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, L1, L2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
[0143] In another embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
Figure imgf000033_0002
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, L1, L2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
[0144] In still another embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
Figure imgf000033_0003
wherein R , R , R , R , R , R , L , L and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
[0145] In still another embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
Figure imgf000034_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, L1, L2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
[0146] In a further embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
Figure imgf000034_0002
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, L1, L2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
[0147] In a further embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have the formula:
Figure imgf000034_0003
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, L1, L2 and Q are as defined above for the compounds of Formula (I).
[0148] In certain preferred embodiments ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I), the Aryl sulfonyl portion has the formula:
Figure imgf000035_0001
[0149] In more preferred embodiments ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I), the Aryl sulfonyl portion has the formula:
Figure imgf000035_0002
[0150] In a preferred embodiment, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) have a substituted piperazine ring with the following stereochemistry:
Figure imgf000035_0003
[0151] In still further preferred embodiments, the Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) comprise an aryl sulfonyl piperazine component having the formula and stereochemistry below:
Figure imgf000035_0004
[0152] Illustrative Aryl Sulfonamide compounds of Formula (I) include the compounds listed below:
Figure imgf000036_0001
Figure imgf000036_0002
Figure imgf000037_0001
Figure imgf000037_0002
23 24a
Figure imgf000038_0001
26 27
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, stereoisomers and prodrugs thereof.
[0153] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can have asymmetric centers and therefore exist in different enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms. This invention relates to the use of all optical isomers and stereoisomers ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds, and mixtures thereof, and to all pharmaceutical compositions and methods of freatment that may employ or contain them.
[0154] It should be noted that racemates, racemic mixtures, and stereoisomers, particularly diastereomeric mixtures or diastereomerically pure compounds and enantiomers or enantiomerically pure compounds ofthe above are all encompassed.
[0155] The present invention also provides compositions comprising a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I) and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, carrier, diluent or excipient.
[0156] The invention further provides Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) that are in isolated and purified form.
[0157] The invention provides methods for freating diabetes comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I). [0158] The invention also provides methods for treating obesity comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0159] The invention further provides methods for freating an HSD-mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0160] The invention further provides methods for freating an 11 /3-HSD 1 -mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0161 ] The invention further provides methods for freating an 11 /3-HSD2-mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0162] The invention further provides methods for freating an 17/3-HSD3 -mediated condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0163] The invention further provides methods for freating an HSD-responsive condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0164] The invention further provides methods for freating an 11 /3-HSD 1 -responsive condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0165] The invention further provides methods for freating an 1 l/3-HSD2-responsive condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I).
[0166] The invention further provides methods for treating an 17/3-HSD3 -responsive condition or disorder comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I). MAKING THE ARYL SULFONAMIDE COMPOUNDS
[0167] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds can be made using synthetic methods well- known to one of ordinary skill in the art of organic synthesis or by using the synthetic procedures outlined below in Schemes 1-2.
Scheme 1
Figure imgf000040_0001
[0168] In Scheme 1, substituted sulfonamide compounds of formula A can be alkylated using elecfrophile compounds of formula B (wherein LG is an aldehyde or a good leaving group such as a halide, mesylate, or triflate) to provide compounds of Formula (I) using methods well-known to those of skill in the relevant art. The substituent(s) on the sulfonamide aryl ring can be further modified using known procedures to provide the desired compounds of Formula (I). Stereochemistry in the substituent may be set by substrate control, control via an auxiliary, or control via a chiral catalyst.
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000040_0002
[0169] In Scheme 2, substituted phenylsulfonyl chloride compounds of formula C can be alkylated using piperazine compounds of formula D to provide compounds of Formula (I) using methods well-known to those of skill in the relevant art. The substituent(s) on the sulfonamide aryl ring can be further modified using known procedures to provide the desired compounds of Formula (I). Stereochemistry in the substituent may be set by substrate control, control via an auxiliary, or control via a chiral catalyst.
[0170] Exemplary methods for the preparation ofthe compounds of Formulas A, B, C, and D are provided below. One of ordinary skill in the relevant art will recognize that additional methods to the methods presented herein may be useful for making the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) and that the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) can be made using conventional synthetic organic chemical methods, starting materials, and reagents.
[0171] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds of Formula (I) can have one or more asymmetric centers and therefore exist in different enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms. An Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be in the form of an optical isomer, an enantiomer, a racemate, or a diastereomer. Accordingly, the invention encompasses Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds and their uses as described herein in the form of their optical isomers, racemates, diastereomers, enantiomers, and mixtures thereof, including a racemic mixture.
[0172] One of skill in the art will understand that the synthetic routes provided above can be modified to use different starting materials and alternate reagents to accomplish the desired transformations. In general, the compounds ofthe invention maybe synthesized via bond forming reactions which disconnect any torsional bond present in the compound. Particularly facile synthesis of compounds ofthe invention occurs when the synthesis proceeds via the connection of fragments at the disconnection points a, b, c and d, as shown below for an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound of Formula (I):
Figure imgf000041_0001
(i)
[0173] Those skilled in the art will recognize that fragments may be assembled in any order to synthesize compounds ofthe invention.
COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF ADMINISTRATION
[0174] Pharmaceutical compositions and single unit dosage forms comprising an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable stereoisomer, prodrug, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof, are also encompassed by the invention. Individual dosage forms ofthe invention may be suitable for oral, mucosal (including sub lingual, buccal, rectal, nasal, or vaginal), parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, bolus injection, intraarterial, or intravenous), fransdermal, or topical administration.
[0175] Single unit dosage forms ofthe invention are suitable for oral, mucosal (e.g., nasal, sublingual, vaginal, buccal, or rectal), parenteral (e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, bolus injection, intramuscular, or intraarterial), or fransdermal adminisfration to a patient.
Examples of dosage forms include, but are not limited to: tablets; caplets; capsules, such as soft elastic gelatin capsules; cachets; troches; lozenges; dispersions; suppositories; ointments; cataplasms (poultices); pastes; powders; dressings; creams; plasters; solutions; patches; aerosols (e.g., nasal sprays or inhalers); gels; liquid dosage forms suitable for oral or mucosal adminisfration to a patient, including suspensions (e.g., aqueous or non-aqueous liquid suspensions, oil-in-water emulsions, or a water-in-oil liquid emulsions), solutions, and elixirs; liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral adminisfration to a patient; and sterile solids (e.g., crystalline or amorphous solids) that can be reconstituted to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral adminisfration to a patient.
[0176] The composition, shape, and type of dosage forms ofthe invention will typically vary depending on their use. For example, a dosage form used in the acute freatment of diabetes or a related disease may contain larger amounts of one or more ofthe active ingredients it comprises than a dosage form used in the chronic treatment ofthe same disease. Similarly, a parenteral dosage form may contain smaller amounts of one or more ofthe active ingredients it comprises than an oral dosage form used to treat the same disease or disorder. These and other ways in which specific dosage forms encompassed by this invention will vary from one another will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
[0177] Typical pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprise one or more carriers, excipients or diluents. Suitable excipients are well known to those skilled in the art of pharmacy, and non-limiting examples of suitable excipients are provided herein. Whether a particular excipient is suitable for incorporation into a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form depends on a variety of factors well known in the art including, but not limited to, the way in which the dosage form will be administered to a patient. For example, oral dosage forms such as tablets may contain excipients not suited for use in parenteral dosage forms. The suitability of a particular excipient may also depend on the specific active ingredients in the dosage form. [0178] This invention further encompasses anhydrous (e.g., <1% water) pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprising active ingredients, since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds. For example, the addition of water (e.g., 5%) is widely accepted in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long-term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf-life or the stability of formulations over time. See, e.g., Jens T. Carstensen, Drug Stability: Principles & Practice, 2d. Ed., Marcel Dekker, NY, NY, 1995, pp. 379-80. In effect, water and heat accelerate the decomposition of some compounds. Thus, the effect of water on a formulation can be of great significance since moisture and/or humidity are commonly encountered during manufacture, handling, packaging, storage, shipment, and use of formulations.
[0179] Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms ofthe invention can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions. Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise lactose and at least one active ingredient that comprises a primary or secondary amine are preferably anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected.
[0180] An anhydrous pharmaceutical composition should be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained. Accordingly, anhydrous compositions are preferably packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastics, unit dose containers (e.g., vials), blister packs, and strip packs.
[0181] The invention further encompasses pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise one or more compounds that reduce the rate by which an active ingredient will decompose. Such compounds, which are referred to herein as "stabilizers," include, but are not limited to, antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, pH buffers, or salt buffers.
[0182] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be administered to a mammal (human, mouse, rat, rabbit, dog, cat, bovine, pig, monkey etc.) as an 11/3-HSDl modulator, a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of diabetes, a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of diabetic complication (retinopathy, nephropathy, neuropathy, cardiac infarction and cerebral infarction based on arteriosclerosis etc.), a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of hyperlipemia, a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of obesity, neurodegenerative disease and the like, or a prophylactic or therapeutic drug of diseases mediated by 11/3-HSDl.
[0183] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be administered to a mammal concurrently with an additional therapeutic agent for the treatment of a disease, such as diabetes or obesity, with the aim ofthe prophylaxis or freatment of a disease. As such, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe present invention can be administered in combination with other therapeutic agents for the freatment or prevention of numerous diseases, including, but not limited to, diabetes and obesity.
[0184] Depending on the disease to be treated and the patient's condition, the compounds of the invention may be administered by oral, parenteral (e.g., inframuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, ICV, infracisternal injection or infusion, subcutaneous injection or implant), inhalation, nasal, vaginal, rectal, sublingual, or topical (e.g., fransdermal, local) routes of administration and may be formulated, alone or together, in suitable dosage unit formulations containing conventional non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants and vehicles appropriate for each route of adminisfration. The invention also contemplates adminisfration ofthe compounds ofthe invention in a depot formulation, in which the active ingredient is released over a defined time period.
[0185] In the case of a combined adminisfration, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound may be administered simultaneously with other another therapeutic agent that is useful for the freatment or prevention of diabetes, obesity or other disease or may be administered at a time prior to or subsequent to another therapeutic agent. In the case of combined adminisfration, a pharmaceutical composition containing the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and an additional therapeutic agent can be administered. Alternatively, a pharmaceutical composition containing the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and a pharmaceutical composition containing an additional therapeutic agent may be administered separately. The adminisfration routes of respective pharmaceutical compositions may be the same or different.
[0186] In the case of a combined adminisfration, the Aryl Sulfonamide Compound may be administered at a dose of 50 mg to 800 mg per adminisfration, which is given once to several times a day. In addition, the compound may be administered at a smaller dose. The combined pharmaceutical agent can be administered at a dose generally employed for the prophylaxis or freatment of diabetes or obesity or at a smaller dose than that. [0187] Like the amounts and types of excipients, the amounts and specific types of active ingredients in a dosage form may differ depending on factors such as, but not limited to, the route by which it is to be administered to patients. However, typical dosage forms ofthe invention comprise an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate, polymorph or prodrug thereof. In the freatment or prevention of diabetes, obesity, glaucoma, osteoporosis, cognitive disorders, immune disorders, depression or other conditions or disorders associated with the modulation of an hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase, an appropriate dosage level will generally be from about 0.001 to about 100 mg per kg patient body weight per day which can be administered in single or multiple doses. Preferably, the dosage level will be from about 0.01 to about 25 mg/kg per day; more preferably from about 0.05 to about 10 mg/kg per day. A suitable dosage level may be from about 0.01 to about 25 mg/kg per day, about 0.05 to about 10 mg/kg per day, or about 0.1 to about 5 mg/kg per day. Within this range the dosage may be from about 0.005 to about 0.05, about 0.05 to about 0.5 or about 0.5 to about 5.0 mg/kg per day. For oral adminisfration, the dosage levels lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 2000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose in the morning but preferably as divided doses throughout the day taken with food. More preferably, the daily dose is administered twice daily in equally divided doses. Preferably, a daily dose range should be from about 5 mg to about 500 mg per day, more preferably, between about 10 mg and about 200 mg per day. In managing the patient, the therapy should be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps from about 1 mg to about 25 mg, and increased if necessary up to from about 200 mg to about 2000 mg per day as either a single dose or divided doses, depending on the patient's global response.
[0188] For multidrug therapy, the weight ratio ofthe compound ofthe invention to the second active ingredient may be varied and will depend upon the effective dose of each ingredient. Generally, an effective dose of each will be used. Thus, for example, when a compound ofthe invention is combined with an NSAID, the weight ratio ofthe compound of the invention to the NSATD will generally range from about 1000:1 to about 1:1000, preferably about 200:1 to about 1:200. Combinations of a compound ofthe invention and other active ingredients will generally also be within the aforementioned range, but in each case, an effective dose of each active ingredient should be used.
[0189] It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and frequency of dosage for any particular patient may be varied and will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity ofthe specific compound employed, the metabolic stability and length of action of that compound, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, mode and time of adminisfration, rate of excretion, drug combination, the severity ofthe particular condition, and the host undergoing therapy.
ORAL DOSAGE FORMS
[0190] Pharmaceutical compositions ofthe invention that are suitable for oral adminisfration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, including, but are not limited to, tablets (e.g., chewable tablets), caplets, capsules, and liquids (e.g., flavored syrups). Such dosage forms contain predetermined amounts of active ingredients, and may be prepared by methods of pharmacy well known to those skilled in the art. See generally, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
[0191] Typical oral dosage forms ofthe invention are prepared by combining the active ingredient(s) in an intimate admixture with at least one excipient according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques. Excipients can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for admimsfration. For example, excipients suitable for use in oral liquid or aerosol dosage forms include, but are not limited to, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, and coloring agents. Examples of excipients suitable for use in solid oral dosage forms (e.g., powders, tablets, capsules, and caplets) include, but are not limited to, starches, sugars, micro-crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents.
[0192] Because of their ease of adminisfration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit forms, in which case solid excipients are employed. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such dosage forms can be prepared by any ofthe methods of pharmacy. In general, pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredients with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product into the desired presentation if necessary.
[0193] For example, a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding. Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredients in a free- flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture ofthe powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
[0194] Examples of excipients that can be used in oral dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, binders, fillers, disintegrants, and lubricants. Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, (e.g., Nos. 2208, 2906, 2910), microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof.
[0195] Examples of fillers suitable for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dexfrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof. The binder or filler in pharmaceutical compositions ofthe invention is typically present in from about 50 to about 99 weight percent ofthe pharmaceutical composition or dosage form.
[0196] Suitable forms of microcrystalline cellulose include, but are not limited to, the materials sold as AVICEL-PH-101, AVICEL-PH-103 AVICEL RC-581, AVICEL-PH-105 (available from FMC Corporation, American Viscose Division, Avicel Sales, Marcus Hook, PA), and mixtures thereof. An specific binder is a mixture of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose sold as AVICEL RC-581. Suitable anhydrous or low moisture excipients or additives include AVICEL-PH-103™ and Starch 1500 LM.
[0197] Disintegrants are used in the compositions ofthe invention to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Tablets that contain too much disintegrant may disintegrate in storage, while those that contain too little may not disintegrate at a desired rate or under the desired conditions. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too much nor too little to detrimentally alter the release ofthe active ingredients should be used to form solid oral dosage forms ofthe invention. The amount of disintegrant used varies based upon the type of formulation, and is readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art. Typical pharmaceutical compositions comprise from about 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, specifically from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant.
[0198] Disintegrants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, and mixtures thereof.
[0199] Lubricants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms ofthe invention include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laureate, agar, and mixtures thereof. Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. of Baltimore, MD), a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica (marketed by Degussa Co. of Piano, TX), CAB-0-SIL (a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, MA), and mixtures thereof. If used at all, lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent ofthe pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are incorporated.
[0200] For oral adminisfration, the compositions are preferably provided in the form of tablets containing about 1 to about 1000 milligrams ofthe active ingredient, hi other embodiments, the compositions are provided in provided in the form of tablets containing about 1.0, about 5.0, about 10.0, about 15.0. about 20.0, about 25.0, about 50.0, about 75.0, about 100.0, about 150.0, about 200.0, about 250.0, about 300.0, about 400.0, about 500.0, about 600.0, about 750.0, about 800.0, about 900.0, or about 1000.0 milligrams ofthe active ingredient for the symptomatic adjustment ofthe dosage to the patient to be treated. The compounds may be administered on a regimen of 1 to 4 times per day, preferably once or twice per day.
DELAYED RELEASE DOSAGE FORMS [0201] Active ingredients ofthe invention can be administered by controlled release means or by delivery devices that are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Patent Nos.: 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; and 4,008,719, 5,674,533, 5,059,595, 5,591,767, 5,120,548, 5,073,543, 5,639,476, 5,354,556, and 5,733,566, each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Such dosage forms can be used to provide slow or confrolled-release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer coatings, microp articles, liposomes, microspheres, or a combination thereof to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions. Suitable confrolled-release formulations known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including those described herein, can be readily selected for use with the active ingredients ofthe invention. The invention thus encompasses single unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gelcaps, and caplets that are adapted for confrolled-release.
[0202] Confrolled-release pharmaceutical products can improve drug therapy over that achieved by their non-controlled counterparts. Ideally, the use of an optimally designed confrolled-release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to cure or control the condition in a minimum amount of time.
Advantages of confrolled-release formulations include extended activity ofthe drug, reduced dosage frequency, and increased patient compliance, hi addition, confrolled-release formulations can be used to affect the time of onset of action or other characteristics, such as blood levels ofthe drug, and can thus affect the occurrence of side (e.g., adverse) effects.
[0203] Most confrolled-release formulations are designed to initially release an amount of drug (active ingredient) that promptly produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually and continually release of other amounts of drug to maintain this level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time. In order to maintain this constant level of drug in the body, the drug must be released from the dosage form at a rate that will replace the amount of drug being metabolized and excreted from the body. Confrolled-release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, temperature, enzymes, water, or other physiological conditions or compounds.
PARENTERAL DOSAGE FORMS [0204] Parenteral dosage forms can be administered to patients by various routes including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous (including bolus injection), inframuscular, and infra-arterial. Because their adminisfration typically bypasses patients' natural defenses against contaminants, parenteral dosage forms are preferably sterile or capable of being sterilized prior to administration to a patient. Examples of parenteral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, solutions ready for injection, dry products ready to be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle for injection, suspensions ready for injection, and emulsions. For example, lyophilized sterile compositions suitable for reconstitution into particulate-free dosage forms suitable for adminisfration to humans.
[0205] Suitable vehicles that can be used to provide parenteral dosage forms ofthe invention are well known to those skilled in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to: Water for Injection USP; aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dexfrose Injection, Dexfrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer's Injection; water-miscible vehicles such as, but not limited to, ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol; and non-aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, and benzyl benzoate.
[0206] Compounds that increase the solubility of one or more ofthe active ingredients disclosed herein can also be incorporated into the parenteral dosage forms ofthe invention.
[0207] Parenteral dosage forms are preferred for the methods of preventing, treating or managing disease in a cancer patient. TRANSDERMAL AND TOPICAL DOSAGE FORMS
[0208] Transdermal and topical dosage forms ofthe invention include, but are not limited to, creams, lotions, ointments, gels, solutions, emulsions, suspensions, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985). Transdermal dosage forms include "reservoir type" or "matrix type" patches, which can be applied to the skin and worn for a specific period of time to permit the penetration of a desired amount of active ingredients.
[0209] Suitable excipients (e.g., carriers and diluents) and other materials that can be used to provide transdermal and topical dosage forms encompassed by this invention are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular tissue to which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be applied. With that fact in mind, typical excipients include, but are not limited to, water, acetone, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane- 1, 3 -diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof to form lotions, tinctures, creams, emulsions, gels or ointments, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable. Moisturizers or humectants can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms if desired. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
[0210] Depending on the specific tissue to be freated, additional components may be used prior to, in conjunction with, or subsequent to treatment with active ingredients ofthe invention. For example, penetration enhancers can be used to assist in delivering the active ingredients to the tissue. Suitable penetration enhancers include, but are not limited to: acetone; various alcohols such as ethanol, oleyl, and tefrahydrofuryl; alkyl sulfoxides such as dimethyl sulfoxide; dimethyl acetamide; dimethyl formamide; polyethylene glycol; pyrrolidones such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; Kollidon grades (Povidone, Polyvidone); urea; and various water-soluble or insoluble sugar esters such as Tween 80 (polysorbate 80) and Span 60 (sorbitan monostearate).
[0211] The pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or ofthe tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied, may also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients. Similarly, the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery. Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery. In this regard, stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the formulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent. Different salts, hydrates or solvates ofthe active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties ofthe resulting composition.
MUCOSAL DOSAGE FORMS AND LUNG DELIVERY
[0212] Mucosal dosage forms ofthe invention include, but are not limited to, ophthalmic solutions, sprays and aerosols, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985). Dosage forms suitable for treating mucosal tissues within the oral cavity can be formulated as mouthwashes or as oral gels. In one embodiment, the aerosol comprises a carrier. In another embodiment, the aerosol is carrier free.
[0213] A compound ofthe invention can also be administered directly to the lung by inhalation (see e.g., Tong et al., PCT Application, WO 97/39745; Clark et al, PCT Application, WO 99/47196, which are herein incorporated by reference). For adminisfration by inhalation, an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be conveniently delivered to the lung by a number of different devices. For example, a Metered Dose Inhaler ("MDI") which utilizes canisters that contain a suitable low boiling propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas can be used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound directly to the lung. MDI devices are available from a number of suppliers such as 3M Corporation, Aventis, Boehringer Ingleheim, Forest Laboratories, Glaxo- Wellcome, Schering Plough and Vectura.
[0214] Alternatively, a Dry Powder Inhaler (DPI) device can be used to administer an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound to the lung (See, e.g., Raleigh et al, Proc. Amer. Assoc. Cancer Research Annual Meeting, 1999, 40, 397, which is herein incorporated by reference). DPI devices typically use a mechanism such as a burst of gas to create a cloud of dry powder inside a container, which can then be inhaled by the patient. DPI devices are also well known in the art and can be purchased from a number of vendors which include, for example, Fisons, Glaxo- Wellcome, Inhale Therapeutic Systems, ML Laboratories, Qdose and Vectura. A popular variation is the multiple dose DPI ("MDDPI") system, which allows for the delivery of more than one therapeutic dose. MDDPI devices are available from companies such as AsfraZeneca, Glaxo Wellcome, IV AX, Schering Plough, SkyePharma and Vectura. For example, capsules and cartridges of gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator can be formulated containing a powder mix ofthe compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch for these systems.
[0215] Another type of device that can be used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound to the lung is a liquid spray device supplied, for example, by Aradigm Corporation. Liquid spray systems use extremely small nozzle holes to aerosolize liquid drug formulations that can then be directly inhaled into the lung.
[0216] In a preferred embodiment, a nebulizer device is used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound to the lung. Nebulizers create aerosols from liquid drug formulations by using, for example, ultrasonic energy to form fine particles that can be readily inhaled (See e.g., Verschoyle et al, British J Cancer, 1999, 80, Suppl 2, 96, which is herein incorporated by reference). Examples of nebulizers include devices supplied by Sheffield/Systemic Pulmonary Delivery Ltd. (See, Armer et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,954,047; van der Linden et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,950,619; van der Linden et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,970,974, which are herein incorporated by reference), Aventis and Batelle Pulmonary Therapeutics. Inhaled compound ofthe invention, delivered by nebulizer devices, is currently under investigation as a freatment for aerodigestive cancer (Engelke et al., Poster 342 at American Association of Cancer Research, San Francisco, Calif, Apr. 1-5, 2000) and lung cancer (Dahl et al., Poster 524 at American Association of Cancer Research, San Francisco, Calif., April 1- 5, 2000).
[0217] In a particularly preferred embodiment, an electrohydrodynamic ("EHD") aerosol device is used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound to the lung. EHD aerosol devices use electrical energy to aerosolize liquid drug solutions or suspensions (see e.g., Noakes et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,765,539; Coffee, U.S. Pat. No., 4,962,885; Coffee, PCT Application, WO 94/12285; Coffee, PCT Application, WO 94/14543; Coffee, PCT Application, WO 95/26234, Coffee, PCT Application, WO 95/26235, Coffee, PCT Application, WO 95/32807, which are herein incorporated by reference). The electrochemical properties ofthe compound ofthe invention formulation may be important parameters to optimize when delivering this drug to the lung with an EHD aerosol device and such optimization is routinely performed by one of skill in the art. EHD aerosol devices may more efficiently delivery drugs to the lung than existing pulmonary delivery technologies. Other methods of infra-pulmonary delivery of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.
[0218] Liquid drug formulations suitable for use with nebulizers and liquid spray devices and EHD aerosol devices will typically include an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Preferably, the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is a liquid such as alcohol, water, polyethylene glycol or a perfluorocarbon. Optionally, another material may be added to alter the aerosol properties ofthe solution or suspension of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound. Preferably, this material is liquid such as an alcohol, glycol, polyglycol or a fatty acid. Other methods of formulating liquid drug solutions or suspension suitable for use in aerosol devices are known to those of skill in the art (See, e.g., Biesalski, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,112,598; Biesalski, 5,556,611, which are herein incorporated by reference). A compound ofthe invention can also be formulated in rectal or vaginal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides.
[0219] In addition to the formulations described previously, an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations can be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by inframuscular injection. Thus, for example, the compounds can be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example, as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt. OTHER DELIVERY SYSTEMS
[0220] Alternatively, other pharmaceutical delivery systems can be employed. Liposomes and emulsions are well known examples of delivery vehicles that can be used to deliver an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound. Certain organic solvents such as dimethylsulfoxide can also be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity. A compound ofthe invention can also be delivered in a confrolled release system. In one embodiment, a pump can be used (Sefton, CRC Grit. Ref Biomed Eng., 1987, 14, 201; Buchwald et al., Surgery, 1980, 88, 507; Saudek et al., N. Engl. J Med, 1989, 321, 574). In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Confrolled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Fla. (1974); Confrolled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem., 1983, 23, 61; see also Levy et al., Science 1985, 228, 190; During et al., Ann. Neurol., 1989,25,351; Howard et al., 1989, J. Neurosurg. 71, 105). fri yet another embodiment, a confrolled-release system can be placed in proximity of the target ofthe compounds ofthe invention, e.g., the lung, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Confrolled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115 (1984)). Other confrolled-release system can be used (see e.g., Langer, Science, 1990, 249, 1527).
[0221] Suitable excipients (e.g., carriers and diluents) and other materials that can be used to provide mucosal dosage forms encompassed by this invention are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular site or method which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be administered. With that fact in mind, typical excipients include, but are not limited to, water, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane- 1, 3 -diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
[0222] The pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied, can also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients. Similarly, the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery. Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophihcity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery. hi this regard, stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the formulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent. Different salts, hydrates or solvates ofthe active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties ofthe resulting composition.
THERAPEUTIC USES OF THE ARYL SULFONAMIDE COMPOUNDS
[0223] In one aspect, the invention provides methods of freating or preventing a condition or disorder associated with the modulation of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases by administering to a patient having such a condition or disorder a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or composition of the invention. In one group of embodiments, conditions and disorders, including chronic diseases of humans or other species, can be freated with modulators, stimulators, or inhibitors of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases, such as 11/3-HSDl. TREATMENT OR PREVENTION OF DIABETES
[0224] Diabetes and diabetic conditions can be freated or prevented by adminisfration of a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
[0225] Types of diabetes that can be freated or prevented by administering a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound include type I diabetes mellitus (juvenile onset diabetes, insulin dependent-diabetes mellitus or IDDM), type II diabetes mellitus (non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus or NIDDM), insulinopathies, diabetes associated with pancreatic disorders, diabetes associated with other disorders (such as Cushing's Syndrome, acromegaly, pheochromocytoma, glucagonoma, primary aldosteronism, and somatostatinoma), type A and type B insulin resistance syndromes, lipafrophic diabetes, and diabetes induced by β-cell toxins.
[0226] In a preferred embodiment, the type of diabetes being freated is type II diabetes.
TREATMENT OR PREVENTION OF OBESITY
[0227] Obesity can be freated or prevented by adminisfration of a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
[0228] Obesity may have genetic, environmental (e.g., expending less energy than is consumed) and regulatory determinants. Obesity includes exogenous, hyperinsulinar, hyperplasmic, hypothyroid, hypothalamic, symptomatic, infantile, upper body, alimentary, hypogonadal, simple and central obesity, hypophyseal adiposity and hyperphagia. Metabolic disorders, such as hyperlidemia and diabetes, and cardiovascular disorders, such as hypertension and coronary artery disease, are commonly associated with obesity.
[0229] Complications due to obesity may also be freated or prevented by administering a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound. Such complications include, but are not limited to, sleep apnea, Pickwickian syndrome, orthopedic disturbances of weight-bearing and non-weight-bearing joints, and skin disorders resulting from increased sweat or skin secretions.
TREATMENT OR PREVENTION OF OTHER CONDITIONS
[0230] Other Conditions that can be treated or prevented by administering a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound include, but are not limited to any condition which is responsive to the modulation, preferably inhibition, of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases or specific isoforms thereof, and thereby benefit from adminisfration of such a modulator. Representative conditions in this regard include, but are not limited to, These conditions and disorders include, but are not limited to, metabolic disorders and related cardiovascular risk factors such as syndrome X, polycystic ovarian disease, eating disorders (e.g., anorexia and bulimia), craniopharyngioma, Prader-Willi syndrome, Frohlich's syndrome, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, low HDL levels, high HDL levels, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia and Cushing's syndrome; diseases associated therewith such as hypertension, atherosclerosis, vascular restenosis, retinopathy and nephropathy; neurologic disorders such as neurodegenerative disease, neuropathy and muscle wasting; cognitive disorders, such as age- related learning disorders; androgen and/or estrogen-related disorders such as prostate cancer, colon cancer, breast cancer, benign prostatic hyperplasia, ovarian cancer, uterine cancer, and male pseudohermaphrodism; endometriosis, dementia, depression, psoriasis, glaucoma, osteoporosis, viral infections, inflammatory disorders, and immune disorders.
ADDITIONAL THERAPEUTIC AGENTS [0231] In one embodiment, the present methods for treating or preventing further comprise the adminisfration of a therapeutically effective amoimt of another therapeutic agent useful for freating or preventing the diseases or disorders disclosed herein. In this embodiment, the time in which the therapeutic effect ofthe other therapeutic agent is exerted overlaps with the time in which the therapeutic effect ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compound is exerted.
[0232] The compounds ofthe invention can be combined or used in combination with other agents useful in the treatment, prevention, suppression or amelioration ofthe conditions or disorders for which compounds ofthe invention are useful, including diabetes, obesity, glaucoma, osteoporosis, cognitive disorders, immune disorders, depression and those pathologies noted above.
[0233] Such other agents, or drugs, may be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, simultaneously or sequentially with an Aryl Sulfonamide
Compound. When an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound is used contemporaneously with one or more other drugs, a pharmaceutical composition containing such other drugs in addition to the compound ofthe invention is preferred. Accordingly, the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention include those that also contain one or more other active ingredients or therapeutic agents, in addition to an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound.
[0234] In one embodiment, for the treatment or prevention of diabetes, an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound can be administered with another therapeutic agent, including, but not limited to, anti-diabetic agents such as insulin, inhaled insulin (Exubera®), insulin mimetics, insulin secretogues, sulfonylureas (e.g., glyburide, meglinatide, glimepiride, gliclazide, glipizide, gliquidone, chloropropresponsivemide, tolbutamide, acetohexamide, glycopyramide, carbutamide, glibonuride, glisoxepid, glybuthiazole, glibuzole, glyhexamide, glymidine, glypinamide, phenbutamide, tolcylamide and tolazamide), biguanides (e.g., metformin (Glucophage®)), -glucosidase inhibitors (e.g., acarbose, voglibose and miglitol), thiazolidinone compounds (e.g., rosiglitazone (Avandia ), froglitazone (Rezulin®), ciglitazone, pioglitazone (Actos®) and englitazone), prandial glucose regulators (e.g., ' repaglinide and nateglinide) and glucagon receptor antagonists.
[0235] In another embodiment, for the treatment or prevention of obesity, an Aryl
Sulfonamide Compound can be administered with another therapeutic agent, including, but not limited to, /33 adrenergic receptor agonists, leptin or derivatives thereof, neuropeptide Y (e.g., NPY5) antagonists, and mazindol.
[0236] Examples of other therapeutic agents that may be combined with an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, either administered separately or in the same pharmaceutical compositions, include, but are not limited to: (i) cholesterol lowering agents such as HMG- CoA reductase inhibitors (e.g., lovastatin, simvastatin (Zocor®), pravastatin, fluvastatin, atorvastatin (Lipitor®) and other statins), bile acid sequesfrants (e.g., cholestyramine and colestipol), vitamin B3 (also known as nicotinic acid, or niacin), vitamin B6 (pyridoxine), vitamin B12 (cyanocobalamin), fibric acid derivatives (e.g., gemfibrozil, clofibrate, fenofibrate and benzafibrate), probucol, nitroglycerin, and inhibitors of cholesterol absorption (e.g., beta-sitosterol and acylCoA-cholesterol acylfransferase (ACAT) inhibitors such as melinamide), HMG-CoA synthase inhibitors, squalene epoxidase inhibitors and squalene synthetase inhibitors; (ii) antithrombotic agents, such as thrombolytic agents (e.g., streptokinase, alteplase, anisfreplase and reteplase), heparin, hirudin and warfarin derivatives, /3-blockers (e.g., atenolol), β adrenergic agonists (e.g., isoproterenol), angiotensin II antagonists, ACE inhibitors and vasodilators (e.g., sodium nifroprusside, nicardipine hydrochloride, nitroglycerin and enaloprilat); (iii) PPAR agonists, e.g., PPARγ and PPARδ agonists; (iv) DP antagonists; (v) lubricants or emollients such as petrolatum and lanolin, keratolytic agents, vitamin D3 derivatives (e.g., calcipotriene and calcipotriol (Dovonex®)), PUVA, anthralin (Drithrocreme®), efretinate (Tegison®) and isofretinoin; (vi) glaucoma therapies such as cholinergic agonists (e.g., pilocarpine and carbachol), cholinesterase inhibitors (e.g., physostigmine, neostigmine, demacarium, echothiophate iodide and isofluorophate), carbonic anhydrase inhibitors (e.g., acetazolamide, dichlorphenamide, methazolamide, ethoxzolamide and dorzolamide), non-selective adrenergic agonists (e.g., epinephrine and dipivefrin), α2-selecteive adrenergic agonists (e.g., apraclonidine and brimonidine), /3-blockers (e.g., timolol, betazolol, levobunolol, carteolol and metipranolol), prostaglandin analogs (e.g., latanoprost) and osmotic diuretics (e.g., glycerin, mannitol and isosorbide); corticosteroids, such as beclomethasone, methylprednisolone, betamethasone, prednisone, prenisolone, dexamethasone, fluticasone and hydrocortisone, and corticosteroid analogs such as budesonide; (vii) immunosuppressants such as cyclosporine (cyclosporine A, Sandimmune®, Neoral®), tacrolimus (FK-506, Prograf®), rapamycin (sirolimus, Rapamune®) and other FK-506 type immunosuppressants, and mycophenolate, e.g., mycophenolate mofetil (CellCept®); (viii) non-steroidal antiinflammatory agents (NSAIDs) such as propionic acid derivatives (e.g., alminoprofen, benoxaprofen, bucloxic acid, carprofen, fenbufen, fenoprofen, fluprofen, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen, indoprofen, ketoprofen, miroprofen, naproxen, oxaprozin, pirprofen, pranoprofen, suprofen, tiaprofenic acid and tioxaprofen), acetic acid derivatives (e.g., indomethacin, acemetacin, alclofenac, clidanac, diclofenac, fenclofenac, fenclozic acid, fentiazac, furofenac, ibufenac, isoxepac, oxpinac, sulindac, tiopinac, tolmetin, zidometacin and zomepirac), fenamic acid derivatives (e.g., flufenamic acid, meclofenamic acid, mefenamic acid, niflumic acid and tolfenamic acid), biphenylcarboxylic acid derivatives (e.g., diflunisal and flufenisal), oxicams (e.g., isoxicam, piroxicam, sudoxicam and tenoxican), sahcylates (e.g., acetylsalicylic acid and sulfasalazine) and the pyrazolones (e.g., apazone, bezpiperylon, feprazone, mofebutazone, oxyphenbutazone and phenylbutazone); (ix) cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) inhibitors such as celecoxib (Celebrex®) and rofecoxib (Vioxx®); (xi) inhibitors of phosphodiesterase type IV (PDE-IV); (xii) opioid analgesics such as codeine, fentanyl, hydromorphone, levorphanol, meperidine, methadone, morphine, oxycodone, oxymorphone, propoxyphene, buprenoφhine, butoφhanol, dezocine, nalbuphine and pentazocine; (xiii) a hepatoprotective agent; and (xiv) other compounds such as 5-aminosalicylic acid and prodrugs thereof.
[0237] The weight ratio ofthe compound ofthe invention to the second active ingredient may be varied and will depend upon the effective dose of each ingredient. Generally, an effective dose of each will be used. Thus, for example, when an Aryl Sulfonamide
Compound is combined with an NSAID, the weight ratio ofthe compound ofthe invention to the NSAID will generally range from about 1000:1 to about 1:1000, preferably about 200:1 to about 1:200. Combinations of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and other active ingredients will generally also be within the aforementioned range, but in each case, an effective dose of each active ingredient should be used. KITS
[0238] The invention encompasses kits that can simplify the adminisfration of the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds or composition ofthe invention to a patient.
[0239] A typical kit of the invention comprises a unit dosage of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound, hi one embodiment, the unit dosage form is in a container, which can be sterile, containing a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle. In another embodiment, the unit dosage form is in a container containing a therapeutically effective amount of an Aryl Sulfonamide Compound as a lyophilate or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hi this instance, the kit can further comprise another container that contains a solution useful for the reconstitution ofthe lyophilate or dissolution ofthe salt. The kit can also comprise a label or printed instructions for use ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds.
[0240] In a further embodiment, the kit comprises a unit dosage form of a composition of the invention.
[0241] Kits ofthe invention can further comprise one or more devices that are useful for administering the unit dosage forms ofthe Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds or a composition of the invention. Examples of such devices include, but are not limited to, a syringe, a drip bag, a patch or an enema, which optionally contain the unit dosage forms.
[0242] The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments disclosed in the examples which are intended as illusfrations of a few aspects ofthe invention and any embodiments that are functionally equivalent are within the scope of this invention.
Indeed, various modifications ofthe invention in addition to those shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art and are intended to fall within the scope ofthe appended claims. To this end, it should be noted that one or more hydrogen atoms or methyl groups may be omitted from the drawn structures consistent with accepted shorthand notation of such organic compounds, and that one skilled in the art of organic chemistry would readily appreciate their presence.
EXAMPLES [0243] The Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds represented by the formulas of the present invention and the methods of making thereof are explained in detail in the following Examples, which are not to be construed as limitative. Example 1 Preparation of 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l -pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine-1 -sulfonyl]phenyl}propan-2-ol (1).
Figure imgf000061_0001
Figure imgf000061_0002
Figure imgf000061_0003
[0244] Step a. l-Pyridm-4-yl-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester. A 500 mL flask was charged with 2.5 g ethyl 4-pyridylacetate (15.15 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), 45 mL THF and 45 mL DMF, followed by the addition of 1.8 g sodium hydride (75.0 mmol, 5.0 equiv.). The resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature for 15 min, and then 2 mL 1,2- dibromoethane (46.38 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) was introduced via an addition funnel. After stirring for another 2 h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, extracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the product. Purification ofthe residue by flash chromatography (SiO2, 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a yellow liquid (2.2 g, 12.15 mmol).
[0245] Step b. (l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropyl) methanol. To a 100 mL flask containing 165 mg l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 10 mL THF was carefully added 3.0 mL of 1.0 M DIBAL-H in toluene. The reaction was allowed to stir for 1 h at which it was diluted with 5 mL of 1 N HC1. The solution was then extracted (2 x MeOH/CΕkCfe), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 10 MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a white solid (80 mg , 0.54 mmol). [0246] Step c. 4-(l-ChloromethyIcyclopropyl) pyridine. To a 250 mL flask containing 333 mg of l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethanol 2.23 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 10 mL CH2C12 under N2 was added 0.18 mL thionyl chloride (2.46 mmol, 1.1 equiv.). After stirring for 2 h, the solution was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the product as a white solid which was sufficiently pure to continue to the next step.
[0247] Step d. (R)-3-Methyl-l-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine. A 250 mL flask was charged with 250 mg (R)-(-)-2-methylpiperazine (10.0 mmol, 2.5 equiv.), 334 mg 4-(l-chloromethylcyclopropyl) pyridine (2.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 15 mL acetonitrile. The flask was equipped with a reflux condenser, and then placed into a preheated 100 °C bath. After stirring for 24 h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the product as a yellow liquid.
[0248] Step e. (R)-l-{4-[2-Methyl-4-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine-1- sulfonyl] -phenyl} ethanone. A portion ofthe product obtained above (462 mg, 2.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 10 mL CH2C12 was combined in a flask with 436 mg 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (1.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 0.34 mL triethylamine (2.0 mmol, 1.2 equiv.). The solution was allowed to stir for 2 h, followed by dilution with 50 mL CH2C12. The resulting solution was washed (lx brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a yellow liquid (0.5 g, 1.21 mmol).
[0249] Step f. l,l,l-Trifluoro-2-{4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l-pyridm-4-yl-cyclopylmethyl) piperazine-l-sulfonyl]phenyl} propan-2-ol (1). To a 100 mL flask containing 413 mg (R)- 1 - {4-[2-methyl-4-( 1 -pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl)-piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl] -phenyl} ethanone (1.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 5 mL of 0.5 M TMS-CF3 , was added 1 mL of 1.0 M tetrabutylammonium fluoride in THF at 0 °C. After stirring for 2 h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, extracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a yellow solid (0.3 g, 0.2 mmol). 1H NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 8.38 (d, J = 5.58 Hz, 2 H), 7.84 (s, 4 H), 7.26 (d, J = 5.58 Hz, 2 H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 3.94 (m, 1 H), 3.51 (d, J = 12.80 Hz, 1 H), 2.97 (m, 1 H), 2.81 (m, 1 H), 2.70 (d, J = 11.21 Hz, 1 H), 2.61 (d, J = 12.90 Hz, 1 H), 2.41 (d, J = 12.90 Hz, 1 H), 1.94 (m, 1 H), 1.83 (m, 1 H), 1.73( s, 3 H), 0.99 (m, 4 H), 0.83 (d, J = 7.12 Hz, 3 H). Example 2 Preparation of 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l -pyridin-3-yl-cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl]phenyl} -propan-2-ol (2)
Figure imgf000063_0001
[0250] Using the methods described above in Example 1, and substituting ethyl 3- pyridylacetate for ethyl 4-pyridylacetate in step a, Compound 2 was prepared. 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 8.30 (d, J = 4.03 Hz, 1 H), 8.27 (s, 1 H), 7.60 (s, 4 H), 7.20 (dd, J = 7.84, 4.03 Hz, 1 H), 6.86 (s,l H), 4.00 (m, 1 H), 3.59 (m,l H), 3.13 (t, J = 12.26 Hz, 1 H), 2.65 (d, J = 12.46 Hz, 2 H), 2.53 (d, J = 12.46 Hz, 2 H), 2.13 (m,l H), 2.02 (m, 1 H), 1.81 (s, 3 H), 1.01 (d, J = 6.65 Hz, 3 H), 0.88 (m, 4 H).
Example 3 Preparation of l,l,l-trifluoro-2-{4-[4-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl)piperazine-l- sulfonyljphenyl} propan-2-ol (3)
Figure imgf000063_0002
[0251] Using the same methods as Example 1, and substituting piperazine for (R)-2- methylpiperazine in step d, Compound 3 was prepared. 1H NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 8.34 (d, J = 4.85 Hz, 2 H), 7.85 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 7.75 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 7.52 (d, J = 4.85 Hz, 2 H), 2.82 (m,4 H), 2.52 (m, 6 H), 1.73 (s, 3 H), 0.94 (m, 2 H), 0.84 (m, 2 H). Example 4 Preparation of 1 , 1 , 1 ,3,3,3 -hexafluoro-2- {4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-( 1 -pyridin-4-yl cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine- l-sulfonyl]phenyl} propan-2-ol (4)
Figure imgf000064_0001
4 [0252] Step a. 4-(l,l,l,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol-2-yl)benzenesulfonyl chloride. To a mixture of 4-(hexafluoro-2-hydroxylisopropyl)aniline (15.0g, 58 mmol), HC1 (37% in water, 30 mL) and CH3COOH (9 mL) at -15 °C, was added dropwise a solution of NaNO2 (4.4g, 64 mmol) in H2O (5 mL). The internal reaction temperature was kept <-5 °C while stirring for about 45 min. Sulfur dioxide in lecture bottle was introduced into CH3COOH (30 mL) via a pipette for 15 min. to make a saturated solution. CuCl (1.43g, 14.5 mmol) was added to the solution at room temperature. While stirring was continued, introducing SO2 was continued for 20 min. to make a SO2-CuCl complex. At 0 °C, the diazotization reaction mixture was added in portions to the SO -CuCl complex solution. After addition was complete, stirring was continued for 10 min. while the temperature was maintained under 10°C. The reaction mixture was then poured onto a 1 : 1 mixture of H2O-ice (500 mL), and stirring was continued until the ice was melted. The mixture was then extracted with Et2O (3 x 100 mL), the combined organic extracts were washed with H2O (2 x 100 mL), saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (caution, vigorous gas evolution), and brine, dried, and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography ofthe residue, (SiO2, 100% CH2C1 ), provided the intermediate compound 4-(l,l,l,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol-2-yl)benzenesulfonyl chloride (11.42 g). 1H NMR (CDC13) δ 8.17 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 2 H), 8.04 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 2 H), 3.90 (s, 1H), MS 341.2 (M-H).
[0253] Step b. Using the same methods as Example 1, and substituting 4-(l, 1,1,3,3,3- hexafluoropropan-2-ol-2-yl)benzenesulfonyl chloride for 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride in step e of Example 1, l,l,l,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-{4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l-pyridin-4-yl- cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl]phenyl} -propan-2-ol (4) was prepared. 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 8.33 (d, J = 4.00 Hz, 2 H), 7.97 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 2 H), 7.83 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 2 H), 7.24 (d, J = 4.00 Hz, 2 H), 4.05 (m, 1 H), 3.68 (m, 1 H), 3.10-2.10 (m, 7 H), 1.05 (m, 2 H), 0.87 (m, 2 H), 0.76 (d, J = 5.2 Hz, 3 H).
Example 5 Preparation of 1,1, l,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-{4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l-pyridin-3-yl- methylcyclopropylmethyl) piperazine- l-sulfonyl]phenyl} propan-2-ol (5)
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000065_0002
[0254] Step a. 2-Pyridin-3-yl-methylmalonic acid monoethyl ester. A stirred solution of 2.72 mL diisopropylamine (19.55 mmol, 2.3 equiv.) in THF under N2 was cooled to -10 °C and freated with 7.5 mL of n-BuLi in hexane. After 10 min, the mixture was cooled to -78 °C and 3-pyridin-3-yl-propionic acid ethyl ester (1.4 g, 8.5 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was added. After stirring for an additional 20 min. at -78 °C, the reaction mixture was freated with CO2 gas for 10 min, and then quenched with 30 mL of 3 N HC1. The resulting mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and neutralized with saturated aqueous NaHCO3. The solution was thoroughly exfracted with 20% MeOH/CH2Cl , dried (Na2SO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide the product as a white solid. [0255] Step b. 2-Pyridin-3-yl-methylacrylic acid ethyl ester. 2-pyridin-3-yl- methylmalonic acid monoethyl ester (8.5 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a flask with 73 mg piperazine (0.85 mmol, 0.1 equiv.), 255 mg paraformaldehyde (8.5 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 15 mL pyridine. The mixture was refluxed for 2 h, cooled to room temperature and then diluted with saturated NaHCO3. The solution was exfracted (2x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4), concentrated under reduced pressure to provide 0.92 g of the product as a white solid (4.82 mmol).
[0256] Step c. l-Pyridin-3-yl-methylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester. To a 250 mL flask containing 720 mg of 2-pyridin-3-ylmethylacrylic acid monoethyl ester (4.07 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 25 mL CH2C12 under N2 was added a solution of diazomethane (16.60 mmol, 4.08 equiv.) in ether. After stirring for 24 h, the solution was quenched with acetic acid and followed by saturated aqueous NaHCO3, and then extracted with 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2. The extracts were dried (Na2SO ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide the product. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO , 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided 380 mg of 1- pyridin-3-yl-methylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester as a white solid (1.85 mmol).
[0257] Step d. l,l,l,3,3,3-hexafluoro-2-{4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l-pyridin-3-yl- methylcyclopropylmethyl) piperazine-l-sulfonyl]phenyl} propan-2-ol (5).
[0258] Following steps b, c, d and e as provided for Example 1, and substituting 1-pyridin- 3-yl-methylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester for l-pyridin-4-yl- cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester in step b and 4-(l , 1 , 1 ,3,3,3-hexafluoropropan-2-ol-2- yl)benzenesulfonyl chloride for 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride in step e, Compound 5 was prepared. 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 8.37 (m, 2 H), 7.96 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2 H), 7.89 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2 H), 7.72 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.28 (m, 1 H), 4.16 (m, 1 H), 3.72 (m, 1 H), 3.26 (m, 1 H), 2.73 (m, 3 H), 2.47 (m, 1 H), 2.20-1.50 (m, 4 H), 1.20 (d, J = 6.5 Hz, 3 H), 0.59 (m, 2 H), 0.37 (m, 2 H).
Example 6 Preparation of 2-(4-{4-[l-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yl)cyclopropylmethyl]-2-(R)-methyl- piperazine-1 -sulfonyl} phenyl)-!, l,l,l-trifluoro-propan-2-ol (6)
Figure imgf000067_0001
Figure imgf000067_0002
[0259] Step a. l-(6-Chloro-pyridin-3-yl) cyclopropanecarbaldehyde. 1.52 g Dess- Martin periodinane (3.6 mmol, 1.2 equiv.) was added to a solution of 549 mg [l-(6-chloro- ρyridin-3-yl)cyclopropyl] methanol (3.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 30 mL THF. After stirring for 3 h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification of the residue by flash chromatography (SiO2, 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a yellow solid (0.5 g, 2.75 mmol).
[0260] Step b. (R)-l-[l-(6~Chloro-pyridin-3-yl) cyclopropylmethyl]-3- methylpiperazine. To a 250 mL flask containing 1.38 g (R)-(-)-2-methylpiperiazine (13.81 mmol, 5.0 equiv.) and 500 mg l-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yl) cyclopropanecarbaldehyde (2.76 "mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 40 mL 1, 2-dichloroethane was added 1.17 g NaBH(OAc)3 (5.52 mmol, 2 equiv.). After stirring for 24 h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide a colorless liquid which was used directly in the next step.
[0261] Step c. 2-(4-{4-[l-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yl)cyclopropylmethyl]-2-(R)-methyl- piperazine-l-sulfonyl} phenyl)-l,l,l,l-trifluoro-propan-2-ol (6).
[0262] Using the steps e and fin Example 1, and substituting (R)-l-[l-(6-Chloro-pyridin- 3-yl) cyclopropylmethyl] -3 -methylpiperazine for (R)-3 -methyl- 1-(1 -pyridin-4-yl- cyclopropyhnethyl)piperazine in step e, Compound 6 was prepared. lH NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 8.23 (d, J = 2.50 Hz, 1 H), 7.81 (d, J = 8.50 Hz, 2 H), 7.75 ( d, J = 8.50 Hz, 2 H), 7.52 (dd, J = 9.0, 2.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.22 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 4.10 (m, 1 H), 3.65 (m, 1 H), 3.10 (m, 1 H), 2.94 (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.78 (m, 1 H), 2.60 (m, 2 H), 2.45 (m, 1 H), 2.15 (m, 1 H), 2.10 (m, 1 H), 1.83 (s, 3 H), 0.99 (d, J = 6.50 Hz, 3 H), 0.91 (m, 2 H), 0.77 (m, 2 H).
Example 7 Preparation of 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[4-(l -hydroxymethyl-1 -yl-cyclopropylmethyl]-2-(R)- methylpiperazine-l-sulfonyl]phenyl} propan-2-ol (7).
Figure imgf000068_0001
TBSCl HO' OH ^^ H OTBS step a
Figure imgf000068_0002
[0263] Step a. [l-(tert-Butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropyl] methanol. tert- Butyldimethylsilyl chloride (4.5 g, 30.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was added to a suspension of 3 g l,l-bis(hydroxymethyl) cyclopropane (30.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 4.08 g imidazole (60 mmol, 2 equiv.) in THF at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 30 min, and water was added. The resulting solution was exfracted with CH2C12, washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification ofthe residue by flash chromatography (SiO2, 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a colorless liquid (2.2 g, 10.65 mmol).
[0264] Step b. Methanesulfonic acid l-(før^butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropylmethyl ester. Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.92 mL, 2.0 mmol, 1.2 equiv.) was added to a solution of 2.16 g [l-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropyl] methanol (10.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 2.5 mL triethylamine (20 mmol, 2 equiv.) in 20 mL CH2C12 at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 30 min, and water was added. The resulting solution was exfracted with CH2C12, washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide the product as a colorless liquid which was used in the next step.
[0265] Step c. [l-(tert-ButyldimethyIsilanyloxymethyl)cyclopropylmethyl]-3-(R)- methylpiperazine. Methanesulfonic acid[ 1 -(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropylmethyl ester (1.5 g, 5.1 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a sealed tube with 1.28 g (R)-2-methylpiperazine (12.76 mmol, 2.5 equiv.). The mixture was heated at 130 °C for 24 h, cooled to room temperature and diluted with saturated NaHCO3. The solution was exfracted (2 x 10%) MeOH/CH2Cl2), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide a colorless liquid which was used in the next step.
[0266] Step d. l,l,l-trifluoro-2-{4-[4-(l-hydroxymethyl-l-yl-cyclopropyImethyl]-2-(R)- methylpiperazine-l-sulfonyl]phenyl} propan-2-ol (7).Using the steps e and fin Example 1, and substituting (R)-l-[l-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropylmethyl] -3- methylpiperazine for (R)-3 -methyl- l-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine in step e, Compound 7 was prepared. 1H NMR (CDC13, 500 MHz) δ 7.84 (d, J = 8.50 Hz, 2 H), 7.76 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2 H), 4.85 (brs,l H), 4.16 (m, 1 H), 3.64 (m, 2 H), 3.43 (d, J = 8.50 Hz, 1 H), 3.25 (m, 1 H), 3.12 (d, J = 10.5 Hz, 1 H), 2.85 (m, 2 H), 2.40 (m, 2 H), 2.20 (m, 1 H), 2.10 (m, 1 H), 1.82(s, 3 H), 1.16 (d, J = 7.00 Hz, 3 H), 0.56 (m, 2 H), 0.34 (m, 2 H).
Example 8 Preparation of l,l,l-trifluoro-2- {4-[4-(l-imidazol-l-yl-cyclopropylmethyl)-2-(R)- methylpiperazine-l-sulfonyl]phenyl} propan-2-ol (8)
Figure imgf000069_0001
8 [0267] Using steps b and c in Example 7, and substituting 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[4-(l - hydroxymethylcyclopropylmethyl)-2-(R)-methylpiperazine- 1 -sulfonyl]phenyl}propan-2-ol for [l-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropyl] methanol in step b and imidazole for (R)-2-methylpiperazine in step c, Compound 8 was prepared. 1H NMR (CDC13, 400
MHz) δ 7.83 (m, 4 H), 7.44 (brs, 1 H), 7.00 (brs, 1 H), 6.94 (brs, 1 H), 4.14 (m,l H), 3.82 (m,
2 H), 3.77 (d, J = 11.60 Hz, 1 H), 2.28 (m, 1 H), 2.76 (d, J = 10.50 Hz, 1 H), 2.64 (d, J = 10.50 Hz, 1 H), 2.20-1.80 (m, 4 H), 1.83(s, 3 H), 1.25 (d, J = 6.40 Hz, 3 H), 0.64 (m, 2 H), 0.45 (m, 2 H).
Example 9 Preparation of l,l,l-trifluoro-2- {4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopentyhnethyl) piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl]phenyl} -propan-2-ol (9)
Figure imgf000070_0001
9 [0268] Using the steps a and b in Example 1, and substituting 1,4-dibromobutane for 1,2- dibromoethane in step a, and then the steps b and c in Example 7, and substituting (1- pyridin-4-yl-cyclopentyl) methanol for [l-(tert-butyldimethylsilanyloxymethyl) cyclopropyl] methanol in step b, followed by the steps e and fin Example 1, and substituting (R)-3- methyl-l-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopentylmethyl) piperazine for (R)-3-methyl-l-(l-pyridin-4-yl- cyclopropylmethyl) piperazine in step e, Compound 9 was prepared. !H NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 8.46 (d, J = 5.60 Hz, 2 H), 7.80 (d, I = 8.8 Hz, 2 H), 7.32 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2 H), 7.21 (d, J = 5.60 Hz, 2 H), 3.92 (m, 1 H), 3.80-3.30 (m, 2 H), 3.05 (m, 1 H), 2.40 (s, 2 H), 2.30- 1.60 (m, 11 H), 1.79 (s, 3 H), 1.03 (d, J = 6.50 Hz, 3 H).
Example 10 Preparation of 2-(l-{3-methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hy(hOxy-l- methylethyl)benzenesulfonyl]-2-(l-{3-(R)-methylpiperazin-l-yl-methyl}cyclopropyl) acetamide (10)
Figure imgf000070_0002
Figure imgf000071_0001
10
[0269] Step a. (1 -Hydroxy methylcyclopropyl) acetonitrile. 5,7-Dioxa-spiro[2.5] octan- 6-one (1.48 g, 10.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a flask with 3.12 g tetraethylammoniumcyanide (20.0 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) in 30 mL DMF. The mixture was heated at 70 °C for 24 h, cooled to room temperature and diluted with saturated NaHCO3. The solution was exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide 360 mg ofthe product as a colorless liquid which was used in the next step.
[0270] Following steps c, d, e and fin Example 1, and substituting (1- hydroxymethylcyclopropyl) acetonitrile for (l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropyl)methanol in step c, (1 - {3-(R)-methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro- 1 -hydroxy- 1 -methylethyl)benzenesulfonyl] piperin- 1 - yl-methyl} cyclopropyl) acetonitrile was prepared.
[0271] 2-(l-{3-methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methylethyl)benzenesulfonyl]- 2-(l-{3-(R)-methylpiperazin-l-yI-methyl}cyclopropyl) acetamide (10). 300 mg of potassium hydroxide (5.36 mmol, 30 equiv.) was added to a solution of 80 mg (l-{3-(R)- methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro- 1 -hydroxy- 1 -methylethyl) benzenesulfonyl] -piperin- 1 -ylmethyl} cyclopropyl) acetonitrile (0.18 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 5 mL tert-BuOH. The mixture was heated at 100 °C for 2 h and quenched with water. The resulting solution was extracted with 15% MeOH/CH2Cl2, washed (1 x brine), dried (Na2SO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided 30 mg of Compound 10 as a white solid (0.065 mmol). 1H NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) 7.84 (s, 4 H), 7.05 (s, 1 H), 6.90 (s, 1 H), 6.63 (s, 1 H), 3.98 (m, 1 H), 3.56 (m, 1 H), 3.20 (m, 1 H), 2.80 (d, J = 11.20 Hz, 1 H), 2.63 (d, J = 11.20 Hz, 1 H), 2.10-1.80 (m, 6 H), 1.78 (s, 3 H), 1.10 (d, J = 6.70 Hz, 3 H), 0.42 (m, 2 H), 0.20 (m, 2 H). Example 11 Preparation of l,l,l-trifluoro-2- {4-[4-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutylmethyl) piperazine-1- sulfonyl]phenyl}-propan-2-ol (11)
Figure imgf000072_0001
11 [0272] Step a. l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester. To a 250 mL flask was charged with 3.30 g pyridin-4-yl-acetic acid ethyl ester (20.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), 30mL THF and 30mL DMF. 2.4g NaH (100.0 mmol, 5.0 equiv.) was then added followed by 6.04 g 1,3-Dibromo-propane (30.0 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) slowly. The resulting suspension was allowed to stir for 2 h, and then diluted (water) and exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were washed (2 x water), dried (MgSO4), and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, CH2C12, 2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a yellow oil (2.0 g, 9.74 mmol).
[0273] Step b. (l-Pyridin-4-yI-cyclobutyl)-methanol. To a 250 mL flask was charged with the product obtained above (2.0 g, 9.7 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 10 mL THF. 30 mL DIBAL-H (1.0 mL in Hexanes, 30 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) was added in a flask. The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 2 h and then was diluted with saturated NaHCO and extracted (4 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 3% MeOH/CH2Ci2) provided mthe product as a yellow oil (0.78 g, 4.8mmol).
[0274] Step c. Methanesulfonic acid l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutylmethyl ester. A portion ofthe product obtained above (750 mg, 4.6 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 50 mL CH2C12 was combined in a flask with 700 mg triethylamine (6.9 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) and 580 mg methanesulfonic acid chloride (5.1 mmol, 1.1 equiv.). The solution was allowed to stir for 1/2 h followed by dilution with saturated NaHC03 and extracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 4% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a yellow solid (0.92 g, 3.8mmol). [0275] Step d. l-(l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutylmethyl)piperazine. A portion ofthe product obtained above (200 mg, 0.83 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a pressure tube with 500 mg Piperazine. The resulting mixture was then placed into a preheated 100 °C bath. After stirring for 4 h, the mixture was diluted with 50mL CH2CI2 and saturated NaHC03, exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH2Ci2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (Si02, 4% MeOH/CH2Cl2, 8%
MeOH/CH2Cl2 with P/oNHiOH) provided the product as a yellow oil (160 mg, 0.69 mmol).
[0276] Step d. l-{4-[4-(l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutylmethyl)-piperazine-l-sulfonyl]- phenyl}-ethanone. The product obtained above (160 mg, 0.69 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 5 mL CH2C12 was combined in a flask with 152 mg 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (0.69 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 142 mg triethylamine (1.40 mmol, 2.0 equiv.). The solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by dilution with 20 mL CH2C12. and saturated NaHCO . The aqueous solution was exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a white solid (210 mg, 0.51mmol). [0277] Step e. l,l,l-Trifluoro-2-{4-[4-(l-pyridm-4-yl-cyclobutylmethyl)-piperazine-l- sulfonyl]-phenyl}-propan-2-ol (11). To a 100 mL flask containing product obtained above (210 mg, 0.51 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was charged with 4 mL TMS-CF3 (0.5M in THF). The solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by addition of 4 mL tefrabutylammomum fluoride(1.0M in THF). After stirring for 1 h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 2.5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided Compound 11 as a white solid (140 mg, 0.29 mmol). 1H NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 8.38 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 7.85 (d, I = 8.4 Hz, 2 H), 7.72 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2 H), 7.13 (d, J = 6.1 Hz, 2 H), 2.72 (s, 4 H), 2.66 (s, 2 H), 2.23 (t, J = 4.7 Hz, 4 H), 2.14 (m, 4 H), 1.92 (m, 1 H), 1.74 (m, 4 H). Example 12 Preparation of 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[(R)-2-methyl-4-(l -pyridin-3-yl-cyclobutylmethyl)- piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl]-phenyl} -propan-2-ol (12)
Figure imgf000074_0001
12 [0278] Using the methods described in Example 10, and substituting l-pyridin-3-yl- cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester for l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester in step a and substituting (R)-2-methylpiperazine for piperazine in step d, Compound 12 was prepared. 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 8.36 (d, 2 H), 7.75 (m, 4 H), 7.54 (m, 1 H),
[0 7.32 (m, 1 H), 3.92 (m, 1 H), 3.45 (m,l H), 3.02 (t, J = 12.31 Hz, 1 H), 2.71 (s, 2 H), 2.31- 2.17 (m, 7 H), 2.05 (m,2 H), 1.87 (m, 1 H), 1.82 (s, 3 H), 1.01 (d, J = 6.66 Hz, 3 H).
Example 13 Preparation of l-{3-(R)-methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l -ylmethyl} -cyclobutanecarboxylic acid (13a)and l-{3-(R)- Methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro- 1 -hydroxy- 1 -methyl-ethyl)-benzenesulfonyl]-piρerazin- 1- ylmethyl} -cyclobutanecarboxylic acid amide (13b)
Figure imgf000075_0001
TMS-CF3 step e
Figure imgf000075_0002
13b
[0279] Step a. 1-Hydroxymethylcyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester. To a 500 mL flask under N2 was charged with 5.0g cyclobutane-l,l-dicarboxylic acid diethyl ester (25.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), 30 mL THF and 55 mL lithium tri-tert-butoxyaluminohydride (1.0M in THF, 55 mmol, 2.2 equiv.). The solution was heated at reflux for 5h before cooled to room temperature. Then the suspension was diluted with Saturated NH C1. After stirring for lh, the suspension was filtered through Buckner funnel. The solid was washed (Et2O). Combined fractions were exfracted (3 x Et2O), dried MgS0 ), and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, CH2C12, 2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a colorless oil (1.8 g, 11.4 mmol).
[0280] Step b. 1-Formylcyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester. A portion ofthe product obtained above (700 mg, 4.4 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 15 mL THF was combined in a flask with 2.8 g Dess-Martin periodinane (6.6mmol, 1.5 equiv.). The resulting suspension was allowed to stir for 2 h followed by dilution with saturated NaHC03. The aqueous solution was extracted with (3 x CH2C1 ). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, CH2C12) provided the product as a colorless oil (480 mg, 3.08 mmol).
[0281] Step c. l-[3-(R )-Methyl-piperazin-l-ylmethyl]-cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester. The product obtained above (470 mg, 3.0mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 25 mL 1,2- dichloro-ethane was combined in a flask with 750 mg (R)-(-)-2-methylpiperazine (7.5mmol, 2.5 equiv.) and several drops of acetic acid. 2.54 g of sodium triacetoxyborohydride (12.0 mmol, 4.0 equiv.) was added and the suspension was allowed to stir overnight. The mixture was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), dried (MgSO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure.
[0282] Step d. l~[4-(4-Acetyl-benzenesulfonyl)-3-( R )-methyl-piperazin~l-ylmethyI]- cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester. The residue obtained above in 6 mL CH2CI2 was combined in a flask with 272 mg 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (1.25mmol) and 250 mg triethylamine (2.5 mmol). The solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by dilution with 20 mL CH2θ2 and saturated NaHCO3. The aqueous solution was exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 0.5% MeOH/CH2θ2) provided the product as a colorless oil (230 mg, 0.54 mmol).
[0283] Step e. l-{3-(R )-Methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclobutanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester. To a
100 mL flask containing product obtained above (230 mg, 0.54 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was charged with 4 mL TMS-CF3 (0.5M in THF). The solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by addition of 4 mL tefrabutylammonium fluoride(l .0M in THF). After stirring for 1 h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a colorless oil (205 mg, 0.42mmol).
[0284] Step f. l-{3-(R )-Methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesuIfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclobutanecarboxylic acid. To a 100 mL flask containing product obtained above (205 mg, 0.42 mmol) was charged with 7 mL THF, 3 mL H2O, 3mL MeOH and 50mg LiOH. The resulting mixture was then placed into a preheated 37 °C bath. After stirring for overnight, the mixture was diluted with 20mL H2O and 5mL saturated NaHCO3, extracted (CH2C12). The aqueous solution was acidified with 3N HC1 to pH ~ 3 and then exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4), concenfrated under reduced pressure, to provide Compound 13a as a yellowish solid (170 mg, 0.36 mmol). 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 12.2 (Broad, 1 H), 7.84 (s, 4 H), 6.86 (s,l H), 3.91(m, 1 H), 3.50 (m,l H), 3.02 (t, J = 12.15 Hz, 1 H), 2.65-246 (m, 5 H), 2.25 (m, 2 H), 2.05 (m,l H), 1.87 (m, 3 H), 1.78-1.72 (m, 4 H), 0.98 (d, J = 6.5 Hz, 3 H)
[0285] Step g. l-{3-(R)-MethyI-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclobutanecarboxylic acid amide (13). To a 50
- mL flask containing a portion of product obtained above (40 mg, 0.086 mmol) was charged with 1 mL CH2C12, and 5mL SO2Cl. After stirring for lh, all the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. Then the residue was dissolved in 4 mL CH2C12 and excess amount of NH3 (in DCM) was added to the solution. The resulting solution was allowed to stir for 0.5h followed by dilution with saturated NaHCO3. The aqueous solution was extracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO ) and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide 24 mg of Compound 13b as a white solid (0.052mmol). 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 7.79 (dd, J=8.4Hz, 32.3Hz, 4 H), 4.12(m, 1 H), 3.63 (m,l H), 3.20 (t, J = 12.15 Hz, 1 H), 2.75 (s, 2 H), 2.62 (m, 3 H), 2.43 (m, 2 H), 2.33 (m,l H), 2.20-2.09 (m, 2H), 1.89 (m, 2 H), 1.82 (m, 3 H), 1.12 (d, J = 5.7 Hz, 3 H).
Example 14 Preparation of 1 - {3-(R)-methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l -hydroxy- 1 -trifluoromethyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-yl-methyl}-cyclobutanecarboxylic acid amide (14)
Figure imgf000078_0001
14 [0286] Using the methods described above in Example 12, and substituting 4-(2,2,2-
Trifluoro-1 -hydroxy- l-trifluoromethyl-ethyl)-benzenesulfonyl chloride for 4- acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride in step d, Compound 14 was prepared. 1H NMR (CDC13, 400
MHz) δ 7.87 (m, 4 H), 4.11(m, 1 H), 3.64 (m,l H), 3.19 (t, J = 11.1 Hz, 1 H), 2.73 (d, 1 H),
2.60 (m, 3 H), 2.40 (m, 2 H), 2.30 (m,l H), 2.20-2.05 (m, 2H), 1.88 (m, 3 H), 1.10 (d, J = 6.7
Hz, 3 H).
Example 15 Preparation of l-{3-(R)-methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid amide (15)
Figure imgf000079_0001
[0287] Step a. 1-Hydroxymethyl-cyclopropanecarbonitrile. To a 250 mL flask was charged with 1-cyano-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid ethyl ester (2.0 g, 14.4 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), ethylene glycol dimethyl ether (100 mL), MeOH (10 mL), and NaBH4 (4.4 g, 115.0 mmol, 8.0 equiv.). After stirring for 12h, The suspension was diluted with Saturated NaHCO3 slowly, exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), dried (MgSO4), and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, CH2C12, 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a colorless oil (1.25 g, 12.9 mmol).
[0288] Step b. Methanesulfonic acid 1-cyano-cyclopropylmethyl ester. The product obtained above (1.25 mg, 12.9 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 30 mL CH2C12 was combined in a flask with 2.6 g triethylamine (25.8 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) and 1.92 g methanesulfonic acid chloride (16.8. mmol, 1.3 equiv.) at 0 °C. The solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by dilution with saturated NaHCO3 and exfracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO ) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 1% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a yellow oil (1.9 g, 10.8 mmol). [0289] Step c. l-(3-(R )-Methyl-piperazin-l-ylmethyl)-cyclopropanecarbonitrile. The product obtained above (1.9 g, 10.8 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was combined in a pressure tube with 2.7 g (R)-(-)-2-methylpiperazine( 27.1 mmol, 2.5equiv.). The resulting mixture was then placed into a preheated 100 °C bath. After stirring for 12h, the mixture was cooled to room temperature, diluted with 50mL CH2C12 and saturated NaHCO3, exfracted (3 x 10%
MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure.
[0290] Step d. l-[4-(4-Acetyl-benzenesulfonyl)-3-(R )-methyl-piperazin-l-ylmethyl]- cyclopropanecarbonitrile. The residue obtained above in 20 mL CH2C12 was combined in a flask with 1.88 g 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (8.64 mmol) and 1.75 g triethylamine (17.3 mmol). The solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by dilution with 20 mL CH2C12 and saturated NaHCO3. The aqueous solution was exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Ci2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (Siθ2, 1% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided the product as a colorless oil (1.98 g, 5.48mmol).
[0291] Step e. l-{3-(J? )-Methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclopropanecarbonitrile. To a 100 mL flask containing product obtained above (1.98 g, 5.48 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was charged with 22 mL TMS-CF3 (0.5M in THF, 11 mmol, 2.0 equiv.). The solution was allowed to stir for 2 h followed by addition of 22 mL tetrabutylammonium fluoride(1.0M in THF, 22 mmol, 4.0 equiv.). After stirring for 0.5h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, extracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided 2.0 g of the product as a white solid (4.6 mmol).
[0292] Step f. l-{3-(R )-Methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid amide (15). To a
100 mL flask containing a portion of product obtained above (1.2g, 2.78 mmol) was charged with 60 mL t-BuOH and 4.0g KOH. The resulting mixture was then placed into a preheated 100 °C bath. After stirring for 4h, the mixture was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, extracted (3 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4), concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, Ethyl Acetate) to provide 1.0 g ofthe product as white solid (2.2 mmol). 1H NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 8.11 (s, 1 H), 7.84 (m, 4 H), 7.02 (s, 1 H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 4.02(m, 1 H), 3.58 (m, 1 H), 3.16 (t, J = 12.6 Hz, 1 H), 2.89 (d, J=11.4 Hz, 1 H), 2.76(d, J=11.4 Hz, 1 H), 2.32 (dd, J=13.0 Hz, 74.1 Hz, 2 H), 1.92 (dd, J=3.5 Hz, 11.4 Hz, 1 H), 1.79 (m, 1 H), 1.72 (s, 3 H), 1.03 (d, J = 6.7 Hz, 3 H). 0.95 (d, J=4.3 Hz, 2 H), 0.43 (d, J= .1 Hz, 2 H).
Preparation of -(((R)-3 -methyl-4-(4-((R)- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2- yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin-l-yl)methyl)cyclopropanecarboxamide (15a) and l-(((R)-3- methyl-4-(4-((S)- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin- 1 - yl)methyl)cyclopropanecarboxamide (15b)
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000081_0002
KOH, lΕuOH
Figure imgf000081_0003
15
[0293] Step g. (S)-2-(4-((R)-4-((l-Cyanocyclopropyl) methyl)-2-methyIpiperazin-l- ylsulfonyI)phenyl)-l,l,l-trifluoropropan-2-yl (S)-l-hydroxybutan-2-ylcarbamate. To a 2
L flask containing product obtained above (160 g, 37.1 mmol, 1.0 equiv) in 465 mL CH3CN was added 67.9g DMAP (55.6 mol, 1.5 equiv) at 0 °C. 4-Nitrophenyl chloroformate(89.7g, 44.5 mol, 1.2 equiv) was added in portions. The resulting mixture was allowed to stir for 15 min at 0 °C and 5.5 h at room temperature. (S)-(+)-2-Amino-l-butanol (56.2g, 63.1 mol, 1.7 equiv) was added dropwise via addition funnel. After addition, the solution was allowed to stir for an additional 12 h. Most ofthe CH3CN was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was diluted with EtOAc. The solid was filtered off and washed with EtOAc. The filtrate was washed with sataurated NH4C1, dried and concentrated under reduced pressure. The two diastereomers were purified and separated by flash chromatography (SiO2, 50 % EtOAc /hexanes). The first portion ofthe two close spots was collected and concenfrated under reduced pressure to give 70 g of diastereomer as colorless oil (12.8 mol).
[0294] Step h. l-(((R)-3-Methyl-4-(4-((S)-l,l,l-rifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2- yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin-l-yl)methyl)cyclopropanecarboxamide (15b). To a 500 mL flask containing product obtained above (70. Og, 12.8 mmol) was added 300 mL tBuOH and 50.0g KOH. The resulting mixture was placed into a preheated 90°C bath. After stirring for 12 h, the mixture was diluted with H2O, exfracted (5 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4), concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 90 % EtOAc /hexanes) to give 50.0 g ofthe product as white solid (11.1 mmol, 88%ee). The white solid was dissolved in 800 mL boiling CH3CN. The solution was allowed to cool overnight in an open flask. The crystals which formed overnight were filtered. The filtrate was concenfrated under reduced pressure to give 46g of the final product as white solid (10.2 mmol, 94%ee). 1H NMR (DMSO, 500 MHz) δ 8.02 (s, IH), 7.84 (m, 4 H), 7.00(s, IH), 6.86 (s, IH), 4.03(m, 1 H), 3.59 (m,l H), 3.15 (ddd, J=12.0, 6.0, 3.0Hz, 1 H), 2.85 (d, J=11.5Hz, 1 H), 2.73(d, J=11.5Hz, IH), 2.45 (d, J=13.0Hz, 1 H), 2.21 (d, J=13.0Hz, 1 H), 2.06 (dd, J=3.5Hz, l l.OHz, 1 H), 1.95 (ddd, J=11.5, 5.8, 3.0Hz, IH), 1.73 (s, 3 H), 1.20 (m, 2H). 1.09 (d, J=6.5Hz, 3H), 0.86 (m, 2H).
[0295] Step i. The diastereoisomers were resolved by HPLC. Flow rate 22 mL/min on a Chiralpak AD 20 mm i.d. x 250 mm 10 micron column (Daciel Chemical Industries Ltd), using isopropyl alcohol/hexanes (30/70) as the eluent. The first peak was collected to yield 1 -(((R)-3-methyl-4-(4-((S)- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin-l - yl)methyl)cycloproρanecarboxamide (15b). 1H NMR (DMSO, 500 MHz) 8.02 (s, IH), 7.84 (m, 4 H), 7.00(s, IH), 6.86 (s, IH), 4.03(m, 1 H), 3.59 (m,l H), 3.15 (ddd, J=12.0, 6.0, 3.0Hz, 1 H), 2.85 (d, J=l 1.5Hz, 1 H), 2.73(d, J=l 1.5Hz, IH), 2.45 (d, J=13.0Hz, 1 H), 2.21 (d, J=13.0Hz, 1 H), 2.06 (dd, J=3.5Hz, ll.OHz, 1 H), 1.95 (ddd, J=11.5, 5.8, 3.0Hz, IH), 1.73 (s, 3 H), 1.20 (m, 2H). 1.09 (d, J=6.5Hz, 3H), 0.86 (m, 2H). The second peak off the column gave 1 -(((R)-3-methyl-4-(4-((R)- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2- yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin-l-yl)methyl)cyclopropanecarboxamide (15a). 1H NMR (DMSO, 500 MHz) 8.02 (s, 1 H), 7.84 (m, 4 H), 7.00(s, 1 H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 4.03(m, 1 H), 3.59 (m,l H), 3.15 (ddd, J=12.0, 6.0, 3.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.85 (d, j=11.5 Hz, 1 H), 2.73(d, J=11.5 Hz, IH), 2.45 (d, J=13.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.21 (d, JA3.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.06 (dd, J=3.5, 11.0 Hz, 1 H), 1.95 (ddd, J=11.5, 5.8, 3.0 Hz, 1 H), 1.73 (s, 3 H), 1.20 (m, 2 H). 1.09 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 3 H), 0.86 (m, 2 H); MS (M + H*) 450.1. Example 16 Preparation of 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[2-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-4-(l -pyridin-4-yl- cyclopropylmethyl)-piperazine-l-sulfonyl]-phenyl}-propan-2-ol (16)
Figure imgf000083_0001
[0296] Using the methods described above in steps a and b of Example 10, and substituting (l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropyl)-acetic acid ethyl ester for (l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclobutyl)-acetic acid ethyl ester, (l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropyl)-methanol was prepared.
[0297] Step a. 4-(l-Chloromethyl-cyclopropyl)-pyridine. To a 50 mL flask containing 200 mg of (l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropyl)-methanol (1.34mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 10 mL CH2C12 was added 174 mg thionyl chloride (1.48mmol, 1.1 equiv.). After stirring for 1 h, the solution was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide the product as a brown solid.
[0298] Step b. 2-[l-Benzyl-4-(l-pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl)-piperazin-2-yl]- ethanol. A 250 mL flask was charged with the product obtained above (1.34 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), 2-(l-benzyl-piperazin-2-yl)-ethanol (1.18 g, 5.36 mmol, 4.0 equiv.), and 10 mL acetonitrile. The flask was equipped with a reflux condenser, and then placed into a preheated 100 °C bath. After stirring for 24 h, the solution was diluted with CH2C12 and saturated NaHCO3, exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2), dried (Na2SO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (Si02, 3% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided 310 mg ofthe product as a yellow oil (0.88 mmol).
[0299] Step c. 2-[4-(l-Pyridin-4-yl-cyclopropylmethyl)-piperazin-2-yl]-ethanol. To a 100 mL flask was charged with 500 mg 5% Pd/C and 30mL EtOH under N2. The product obtained above (0.88 mmol) was then added followed by 10 mL cyclohexene. The flask was equipped with a reflux condenser, and then placed into a preheated 80 °C bath. After stirring for 2 h, the solution was hot filtered through a plug of celite. The celite plug was washed (3 x EtOH), and the combined EtOH fractions were concenfrated under reduced pressure to provide the product as a colorless oil.
[0300] Step d. l-{4-[2-(2-HydroxyethyI)-4-(l-pyridin-4-yI-cyclopropylmethyl)- piperazine-l-sulfonyl]~phenyl}-ethanone. The product obtained above ( 0.88 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) in 5 mL CH2C12 was combined in a flask with 193 mg 4-acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (0.88mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and 178 mg triethylamine (1.76 mmol, 2.0 equiv.). The solution was allowed to stir for 1 h followed by dilution with 20 mL CH2C12 and saturated NaHCO3. The aqueous solution was exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 2% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided 100 mg ofthe product as a yellow oil (0.22mmol).
[0301] Step e. l,l,l-Trifluoro-2-{4-[2-(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-4-(l-pyridin-4-yl- cyclopropylmethyl)-piperazine-l-sulfonyl]-phenyI}-propan-2-ol (16). To a 100 mL flask containing a portion of product obtained above (26 mg, 0.059 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was charged with 1 mL TMS-CF3 (0.5M in THF). The solution was allowed to stir for 0.5 h followed by addition of 0.5 mL tetrabutylammonium fluoride(l .0M in THF). After stirring for 0.5 h, the solution was diluted with saturated NaHCO3, exfracted (2 x 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2). The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concenfrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, 4% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided 11 mg of Compoxmd 16 as a colorless oil (0.021 mmol). 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 8.39 (d, J = 5.8 Hz, 2 H), 7.80 (dd, J = 8.7 Hz, J = 21.9 Hz, 4 H), 7.13 (d, J = 6.1 Hz, 2 H), 4.06(m, 1 H), 3.72 (m,l H), 3.62 (m, IH), 3.49 (m, 1 H), 3.12 (t, J = 12.6 Hz, 1 H), 2.64 (dd, J=6.7 Hz, 11.6 Hz, 2 H), 2.43 (dd, J=13.0 Hz, 49.1 Hz, 2 H), 1.83-1.69 (m, 7 H), 0.95 (m, 2 H). 0.75(m, 2 H). Example 17 Preparation of 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[4-(l -imidazol- 1 -yl-cyclopropylmethyl)-2-(R)-methyl- piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl] -phenyl} -propan-2-ol (17)
Figure imgf000085_0001
[0302] Step a. A mixture of 1-aminocyclopropane-l-carboxylic acid methyl ester hydrochloride (1.0 g, 6.60 mmol) in H2O (4 mL), phosphoric acid (85 wt. % in water, 0.2 mL), glyoxal (40 wt.% in water, 0.76 mL, 6.60 mmol) and formaldehyde (37 wt.% in water, 0.50 mL, 6.60 mmol) was warmed and stirred in a 90 °C oil bath. To the mixture NH4C1 (354 mg, 6.60 mmol) in H2O (3 mL) was added dropwise. The stirring was continued for lh. The viscous solution was allowed to cool to room temperature and stirred for lh. The mixture was cooled to 0 °C and KOH (3N) was added dropwise to neutralize the solution to pH 7. The mixture was concenfrated and dried in vacuo. The obtained dry mixture was patiented to a reduction with LAH.
[0303] Step b. To the product obtained from the above reaction in THF (20 mL) LAH (1.0 M in THF, 13.2 mL, 13.2 mmol) was added dropwise at 0 °C. The ice- water bath was removed and stirring was continued at room temperature for 4 h. The solution was allowed to cool to 0 °C and H2O (0.4 mL), NaOH (15 wt. % in water, 0.4 mL) and H2O (1.2 mL) were added sequentially. The cold bath was removed, stirring was continued for 15min. The mixture was then filtered through a pad of Celite, using THF as a rinse. Evaporation ofthe combined filtrates in vacuo, and flash chromatography ofthe residue, using 1.5:8.5:0.05 MeOH-CH2Cl2-NH OH, provided 0.23 g product.
[0304] Step c. To a solution ofthe alcohol (0.23 g, 1.66 mmol) in CH2C12 , SOCl2 ( 0.24 mL, 3.32 mmol) was added dropwise. Stirring at room temperature was continued for 14 h. Evaporation ofthe solvent and the remaining SOCl2 in vacuo and trituration in EtOAc provided the chloride (195mg, HC1 salt). 1H NMR (CDC13) δ 9.40(s, 1 H), 7.95(s, 1 H), 7.73(s, 1 H), 4.12(s, 2 H), 1.53(t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 1.32(t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H); ms 157.1 (M+H). [0305] Step d. A mixture of (R)-(-)-2-methylρiperazine (348 mg, 3.48 mmol) and the chloride (195 mg, 0.99 mmol) was heated and stirred in a 100 °C oil bath for 5 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and dissolved in CH2C12 (3mL). Flash chromatography ofthe solution, using 1.5:8.5:0.05 MeOH-CH2Cl2-NH4OH, provided the coupling product (123 mg). 1H NMR (CDC13) δ 7.55(s, 1 H), 6.96(s, 1 H), 6.93(s, 1 H), 2.88- 2.71(m, 3 H), 2.69-2.62(m, 2 H), 2.52(d, J= 13.5 Hz, IH), 2.47(d, J= 13.5 Hz, 1 H), 2.20(br, 1 H), 2.02(td, J= 11.0 Hz, J= 3.0 Hz, 1 H), 1.79(t, J= 11.0 Hz, 1 H), 1.13-1.06(m, 2 H), 0.95(d, J= 6.5 Hz, 3 H), 0.91-0.88(m, 2 H); ms 221.2 (M+H+).
[0306] Step e. A mixture ofthe coupling product from step d (105.4mg, 0.48 mmol), acetylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (105mg, 0.53 mmol), NEt3 (O.lmL, 0.58 mmol) in CH2C12 was stirred at room temperature for 14 h. Evaporation ofthe solvent in vαcuo, and flash chromatography ofthe residue, using 1 :9:0.05 MeOH-CH2Cl2-NH4OH, provided the sulfonamide (0.17 g). 1H NMR (CDC13) δ 8.07 (d, J= 8.0 Hz, 2 H), 7.89 (d, J= 8.0 Hz, 2 H), 7.52 (s, 1 H), 6.96 (s, 1 H), 6.94 (s, 1 H), 4.13-4.05 (m, IH), 3.68-3.60 (m,l H), 3.14 (td, J= 12.4 Hz, J= 3.1 Hz, IH), 2.75-2.68 (m, IH), 2.68 (s, 3H), 2.57-2.52 (m, 2H), 2.46 (d, J= 13.6 Hz, IH), 2.28 (dd, J= 11.2 Hz, J= 3.6 Hz IH), 2.13 (td, J= 11.5 Hz, J= 3.3 Hz, IH), 1.18-1.13 (m, 2 H), 1.03 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 3 H), 0.92-0.88 (m, 2 H); MS 403.5 (M+H-*).
[0307] Step f. To a mixture ofthe sulfonamide (0.17g, 0.42 mmol) and CF3SiMe3 (0.5M in THF, 2.6 mL, 1.3 mmol) TBAF (1.0 M, 1.3 mL, 1.3 mmol) was added at room temperature. The mixture was stirred for 20 h, diluted with Et2O (20 mL). The solution was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3, and brine, dried, and concenfrated. Flash chromatography ofthe residue, using 0.5:9.5 MeOH-CH2Cl2, provided Compound 17 (125mg). 1H NMR (CDC13) δ 7.82(d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2 H), δ 7.79(d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2 H), 7.06(s, 1 H), 6.92-6.88(m, 2 H), 6.43(br, 1 H), 4.10-3.97(m, 1 H), 3.72-3.60(m, 1 H), 3.25-3.18(m, 1 H), 2.76(dd, J= 14.5 Hz, J= 4.5 Hz, 1 H), 2.68(dd, J= 14.5 Hz, J= 3.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.55-2.46(m, 1 H), 2.42-2.32 (m, 1 H), 2.22- 2.18(m, 0.5 H), 2.08-2.02(m, 1 H), 1.95-1.86(m, 0.5 H), 1.83(s, 3 H), 1.17(dd, J= 7.0 Hz, J= 4.0 Hz, 3 H), 1.15-1.00 (m, 2 H), 0.89-0.81(m, 2 H); ms 473.2 (M+H+).
Example 18
Preparation of l-{3-(R)-methyl-4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclopropanecarboxylic acid (18)
Figure imgf000087_0001
18
[0308] The title compound was prepared in a manner similar to that described for compoxmd 13a, beginning with cyclopropane dicarboxylic acid diethyl ester in place of cyclobutane dicarboxylic acid diethyl ester. 1H NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) 5 13.11 (s, 1 H), 7.84 (m, 4 H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 4.01(m, 1 H), 3.58 (m,l H), 3.14 (ddd, J=12.0, 6.0, 3.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.85 (d, J=12.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.71(d, J=12.0 Hz, IH), 2.51(m, 2H ), 2.11 (dd, j=3.6, 11.5 Hz, 1 H), 1.97 (ddd, J=l 1.5, 5.8, 3.6 Hz, 1 H), 1.74 (s, 3 H), 1.04 (m, 5 H), 0.73 (m, 2 H).
Example 19
Synthesis of 1 , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(cw-3 -hydroxy- 1 -yl- cyclopentyl)piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl]phenyl} -propan-2-ol (19)
Figure imgf000087_0002
19 [0309] Using the same methods as the preceding examples, 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[2-(R)- methyl-4-(c^-3 -hydroxy- 1 -yl-cyclopentyl)piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl]phenyl} -propan-2-ol (19) was prepared. 1H NMR (DMSO, 400 MHz) δ 7.81 (s, 4 H), 6.85 (s, 1 H), 4.50 (d, 1 H), 3.95 (m, 2 H), 3.50 (d, 1 H), 3.09 (m, 1 H), 2.69 (m, 1 H), 2.53 (m, 1 H), 2.31 (m, 1 H), 1.88 (m, 2 H), 1.72 (m, 1 H), 1.70 (s, 3 H), 1.55 (m, 3 H), 1.42 (m, 2 H), 1.19 (m, 1 H), 1.05 (d, 3 H).
Example 20 Synthesis of 1,1, l-trifluoro-2-{4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(cw-3-imidazol-l-yl-cyclopentyl) piperazine- 1 -sulfonyljphenyl} -propan-2-ol (20)
Figure imgf000088_0001
20
[0310] Using the same methods as the preceding examples the following compound was prepared: 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2- {4-[2-(R)-methyl-4-(cw-3-imidazol- 1 -yl-cyclopentyl) piperazine- l-sulfonyl]phenyl}-propan-2-ol: 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 7.82 (s, 4 H), 7.66 (d, J= 2.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.22 (d, J= 5.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.86 (s, 2 H), 4.49 (m, 1 H), 3.98 (m, 1 H), 3.51 (d, J= 10.8 Hz, 1 H), 3.13 (m, 1 H), 2.79 (t, J= 10.5 Hz, 1 H), 2.62 (t, J= 11.7 Hz, 1 H), 2.21 (m, 1 H), 2.04 (m, 1 H), 1.92 (ddd, J= 3.4, 11.2, 11.3 Hz, 1 H), 1.83-1,55 (m, 5 H), 1.72 (s, 3 H), 1.08 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 3 H).
Example 21
2-(4-(4-(2,2-difluoro-2-(pyridin-3 -yl)ethyl)-2-(R)-methylρiρerazin- 1 - ylsulfonyl)phenyl)-l,l,l-trifluoropropan-2-ol (21)
Figure imgf000088_0002
21 [0311] Using the same methods as the preceding examples, 2-(4-(4-(2,2-difluoro-2- (pyridin-3 -yl)ethyl)-2-(R)-methylpiperazin- 1 -ylsulfonyl)phenyl)- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoropropan-2-ol (21) was prepared. 1HNMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 8.7-8.60 (m, 2 H), 7.80-7.77 (m, 5 H), 7.38 (m, 1 H), 4.35 (d, J= 4.80 Hz, 1 H), 4.18 (m, 1 H), 3.61 (d, J= 4.80 Hz, 1 H), 3.11 (m, 1 H), 3.05 (m, 2 H), 2.68 (m, 1 H), 2.45 (s, 2 H), 2.32 (m, 1 H), 1.82 (s, 3 H), 1.00 (d, J= 6.70 Hz, 3 H); MS 494.2 (M+Y ).
Example 22
2-(4-(4-(2,2-difluoro-2-(pyridin-4-yl)ethyl)-2-(R)-methylpiperazin- 1 -ylsulfonyl)phenyl)- 1,1,1 -trifluoropropan-2-ol (22)
Figure imgf000089_0001
22 [0312] Using the same methods as the preceding examples, 2-(4-(4-(2,2-difluoro-2- (pyridin-4-yl)ethyl)-2-(R)-methylpiperazin- 1 -ylsulfonyl)phenyl)- 1,1,1 -trifluoropropan-2-ol (22) was prepared. 1HNMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 8.69 (d, J= 5.27 Hz, 2 H), 7.80 (d, J= 8.67 Hz, 2 H), 7.75 (d, J= 8.67 Hz, 2 H), 7.39 (d, J= 5.27 Hz, 2 H), 4.04 (m, 1 H), 3.56 (d, J= 12.8 Hz, 1 H), 3.35 (d, J= 8.20 Hz, 1 H), 3.08 (m, 1 H), 2.97-2.90 (m, 2 H), 2.67 (d, J= 11.2 Hz, 1 H), 2.54-2.47 (m, 2 H), 2.36 (m, 1 H), 1.83 (s, 3 H), 0.97 (d, J= 5.82 Hz, 3 H); MS 494.2 (M+H+).
Example 23
1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-(4-(4-((l -(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)cyclopropyl)methyl)-2-(R)- methylpiperazin- 1 -ylsulfonyl)phenyl)propan-2-ol (23)
Figure imgf000089_0002
23 [0313] Using the same methods as the preceding examples, l,l,l-trifluoro-2-(4-(4-((l-(2- hydroxypropan-2-yl)cyclopropyl)methyl)-2-(R)-methylpiperazin-l-ylsulfonyl)phenyl)propan- 2-ol (23) was prepared. 1HNMR (DMSO, 500 MHz) δ 7.82 (m, 4 H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 4.71 (m, 1 H), 4.01 (m, 1 H), 3.62 (d, J= 13.4 Hz, 1 H), 3.10 (m, 1 H), 2.93 (d, J= 11.5 Hz, IH), 2.68 (d, J= 9.55 Hz, 1 H), 2.35 (d, J= 15.3 Hz, 1 H), 2.08 (d, J= 15.30 Hz, 1 H), 1.90 (m, 1 H), 1.72 (s, 3 H), 1.70 (m, 1 H), 1.11 (s, 3 H), 1.06 (s, 3 H), 1.03 (d, J= 6.50 Hz, 3 H), 0.68 (m, 2 H), 0.05 (m, 2 H); MS 465.1 (M+H+).
Example 24
4-(l -(((R)-3-methyl-4-(4-((S)-l , 1 , 1 -trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2- yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin-l-yl)methyl)cyclopropyl)benzamide (24b) and 4-(l-(((R)-3- methyl-4-(4-((R)- 1,1,1 -trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin-l - yl)methyl)cyclopropyl)benzamide (24a)
Figure imgf000090_0001
24b 24a
[0314] Using the same methods as the preceding examples, the following compound was prepared following separation ofthe mixture of diastereomers via HPLC (Daicel chiralpak AD 2cm x 25cm column) with an isocratic 18% isopropanol/hexanes mobile phase and a flow rate of 17 mL/minute. 4-(l-(((R)-3-Methyl-4-(4-((S)-l,l,l-trifluoro-2-hydroxypropan- 2-yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin-l-yl)methyl)cyclopropyl)benzamide (24b) and 4-(l-(((R)-3- methyl-4-(4-((R)- 1,1,1 -frifluoro-2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)phenylsulfonyl)piperazin- 1 - yl)methyl)cycloρroρyl)benzamide (24a). 'HNMR (DMSO, 500 MHz, both R and S triflouromethylcarbinol isomers have identical NMR spectra at this resolution) δ 7.88 (s, 1 H), 7.80 (s, 4 H), 7.73 (d, J = 8.50 Hz, 2 H), 7.33 (d, J= 8.50 Hz, 2 H), 7.20 (s, 1 H), 6.84 (s, 1 H), 3.95 (m, 1 H), 3.50 (d, J= 14.3 Hz, 1 H), 3.00 (m, 1 H), 2.80-2.73 (m, 2 H), 2.58 (d, J= 17.8 Hz, IH), 2.35 (d, J= 17.8 Hz, 1 H), 1.96-1.82 (m, 2 H), 1.72 (s, 3 H), 0.83 (m, 2 H), 0.82 (d, J= 6.50 Hz, 3 H), 0.71 (m, 2 H); MS 526.2 (M+H+).
Example 25
Preparation of 1 - {3-(R)-methyl-4-[4-(S)-(2,2,2-trifluoro-l -hydroxy- 1 -methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclopropanecarbonitrile (25)
Figure imgf000091_0001
25
[0315] Using the same methods as the preceding examples, l-{3-(R)-methyl-4-[4-(S)- (2,2,2-frifluoro- 1 -hydroxy- 1 -methyl-ethyl)-benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin- 1 -ylmethyl} - cyclopropanecarbonitiile (25) was prepared. 1H NMR (DMSO, 500 MHz) 7.84 (m, 4 H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 4.01(m, 1 H), 3.58 (m, 1 H), 3.16 (ddd, J=13.0, 6.5, 3 Hz, 1 H), 2.85 (d, j=11.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.73(d, j=11.0 Hz, IH), 2.45 (d, =13.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.21 (d, J=13.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.05 (dd, J=3.5 Hz, 11.5 Hz, 1 H), 1.95 (ddd, J=11.5, 5.8, 3.5 Hz, 1 H), 1.73 (s, 3 H), 1.20 (m,2 H), 1.09 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 3 H), 0.86 (m, 2 H); MS (M + it) 432.1.
Example 26
Preparation of 2-(S)-[4-(4-cyciopropylmethyl-2-(R)-methyl-piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl)-phenyl]- l,l,l-trifluoro-propan-2-ol (26)
Figure imgf000091_0002
26
[0316] Using the same methods as the preceding examples, 2-(S)-[4-(4-cyclopropylmethyl- 2-(R)-methyl-ρiperazine-l-sulfonyl)-phenyl]-l,l,l-trifluoro-propan-2-ol (26) was prepared. The product was resolved by chiral HPLC. The flow rate was 20mL/min on a Chiralcel OD- H 20mmI.D.x 250mm, 5 micron column (Daciel chemical Industries LTD), using isopropyl alcohol / hexanes (8 / 92) as the eluent. The second peak was collected. 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 7.82 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2 H), 7.72 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2 H), 4.04(m, 1 H), 3.56 (m, 1 H), 3.27 (t, J= 11.5 Hz, 1 H), 2.83 (d, J=11.0 Hz 1 H), 2.69 (d, J=11.0 Hz 1 H), 2.16 (m, 3 H), 2.04 (m,l H), 1.80 (s, 3 H), 1.19 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 3 H), 0.76 (m, 1 H), 0.46 (m,2 H), 0.04 (m, 2H); MS (M + H1) 407.0. Example 27
2-(S)-[4-(4-Cyclobutylmethyl-2-(R)-methyl-piperazine- 1 -sulfonyl)-phenyl]- 1 ,1,1 -trifluoro- propan-2-ol (27)
Figure imgf000092_0001
27
[0317] Using the same methods as the preceding examples, 2-(S)-[4-(4-cyclobutylmethyl- 2-(R)-methyl-piperazine-l-sulfonyl)-phenyl]-l,l,l-trifluoro-propan-2-ol (27) was prepared. 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 7.83 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2 H), 7.73 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2 H), 4.04(m, 1 H), 3.56 (m,l H), 3.22 (t, J= 11.5 Hz, 1 H), 2.64 (d, J=l 1.5 Hz 1 H), 2.47 (m, 2 H), 2.29 (m, 2 H), 2.11 (m,l H), 2.00 (m, 3 H), 1.98-1.80 (m, 5 H), 1.63 (m, 2 H), 1.15 (d, J= 6.7 Hz, 3 H); MS (M + H+) 421.1.
Example 28 Preparation of 4-(l - {3 -(R)-methyl-4-[4-((S)-2,2,2-trifluoro- 1 -hydroxy- 1 -methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin- 1 -ylmethyl} -cyclopropyl)-pyridine-2-carboxylic acid amide (28b) and 4-(l-{3-(R)-methyl-4-[4-((R)-2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclopropyl)-pyridine-2-carboxylic acid amide (28a)
Figure imgf000092_0002
28b 28a
[0318] 4-(l-{3-(R)-Methyl-4-[4-((S)-2,2,2-trifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl] -piperazin- 1 -ylmethyl} -cyclopropyl)-pyridine-2-carboxylic acid amide (28b) and 4-(l-{3-(R)-methyl-4-[4-((R)-2,2,2-frifluoro-l-hydroxy-l-methyl-ethyl)- benzenesulfonyl]-piperazin-l-ylmethyl}-cyclopropyl)-pyridine-2-carboxylic acid amide (28a) were prepared using the same methods as the preceding examples following separation ofthe mixture of diastereomers via HPLC. The flow rate was 20mL/min on a Chiralcel AD- H 20mm I.D.x250mm, 5 micron column (Daciel chemical Industries LTD), using isopropyl alcohol/hexanes (8:92) as an eluent. The first peak was collected as 28b. 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 8.40(br, 1 H), δ 8.04(s, 1 H), 7.83(br, 1 H), 7.79(d, J= 8.0 Hz, 2 H), 7.71(d, J= 8.0 Hz, 2 H), 7.33(dd, J= 5.6 Hz, J= 2.4 Hz, IH), 5.49(br, 1 H), 4.06(br, IH), 3.60-3.53(m, IH), 3.49(d, J= 4.0 Hz, 1 H), 3.20-3.05(m, 1 H), 2.85-2.50(m, 4H), 2.15-2.08 (m, IH), 2.08- 1.95(m, 1 H), 1.81(s, 3H), 1.10-0.97 (m, 2 H), 0.97-0.87(m, 3 H), 0.90-0.80 (m, 2 H); MS 527.1 (M+tf-). The second peak was collected as 28a. 1H NMR (CDC13, 400 MHz) δ 8.40(d, J= 4.4 Hz, 1 H), δ 8.05(s, 1 H), 7.83(br, 1 H), 7.79(d, J= 8.0 Hz, 2 H), 7.71(d, J= 8.0 Hz, 2 H), 7.33(dd, J= 4.8Hz, J= 2.0 Hz, IH), 5.50(br, 1 H), 4.03(br, IH), 3.60-3.53(m, IH), 3.49(br, 1 H), 3.08(dd, J= 10.8 Hz, J= 10.8 Hz, 1 H), 2.87 (br, IH), 2.81 (d, J= 8.0 Hz, IH), 2.70-2.56(m, 2 H), 2.54 (d, J= 10.8 Hz, IH), 2.20-2.10 (m, 1 H), 2.05-1.95(m, 1 H), 1.80(s, 3H), 1.10-0.97 (m, 2 H), 0.95(d, J= 5.6 Hz, 3 H), 0.90-0.80 (m, 2 H); MS 527.1 (M+H1).
Example 29
Procedures Useful For The Biological Evaluation Of The Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds
[0319] In addition to the extensive literature disclosing the role of HSDs in various diseases and disorders, assays useful for testing the Aryl Sulfonamide Compounds ofthe present invention are provided.
Assays In vitro 11/3-HSDl (hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase 1) activity inhibitory action
[0320] The 11/3-HSDl inhibitory activity was examined by quantitative determination by an SPA (scintillation proximity assay) system ofthe suppressive action on the conversion from cortisone to cortisol using human 11/3-HSDl (hereinafter recombinant 11/3-HSDl) expressed using a baculo-virus system as an enzyme source. For the reaction, a reagent was added to a 96 well plate (96 well Opti-plates™-96 (Packard)) to the following final concenfration and a volume of 100 μl was reacted at room temperature for 90 min. The reaction solution used was 0.1 μg/ml recombinant 11/3-HSDl, 500 μM NADPH, 16 nM 3H cortisone (Amersham Biosciences, 1.78 Tbq/mol) dissolved in 0.1% BSA (Sigma)-containing PBS and the test drug was 2 μl of a compound solution (dissolved in DMSO). After 90 min, the reaction was stopped by adding PBS (40 μl, containing 0.1% BSA (Sigma)) containing 0.08 μg of anti-cortisol mouse monoclonal antibody (East Coast Biologies), 365 μg SPA PVT mouse antibody-binding beads (Amersham Biosciences) and 175 μM carbenoxolone (Sigma) to the reaction solution. After the completion ofthe reaction, the plate was incubated overnight at room temperature and the radioactivity was measured by Topcount (Packard). For control, the value (0% inhibition) ofthe well containing 2 μl of DMSO instead ofthe test drug was used, and for positive control, the value (100% inhibition) ofthe well containing carbenoxolone instead ofthe test drug at the final concenfration of 50 μM was used. The inhibition (%) ofthe test drug was calculated by ((value of control - value of test drug)/(value of control - value of positive control)) x 100 (%). The IC5o value was analyzed using a computer-based curve fitting soft.
Biochemical llff-HSDl assay by SPA
[0321] Recombinant human, mouse and rat 11/3-HSDl were expressed in baculovirus expression system, isolated by affinity purification and used as the enzyme sources for cortisone to cortisol conversion in vitro. H-Cortisone (Amersham Bioscience, 1.78 Tbq/mol. 49 Ci/mmol) was used as the substrate, and a monoclonal anti-cortisol antibody and the scintillation proximity assay (SPA) system were used to detect the product ofthe 11/3-HSD1- catalyzed reaction, 3H-cortisol. Reactions took place at room temperature for 90 min. in 96- well Opti-plates™-96 (Packard) in 100 μL volume with 2 μL test compounds or control in DMSO, 0.1 μg/mL 11/3-HSDl protein, 500 μM NADPH and 16 nM radioactive cortisone, in PBS buffer supplemented with 0.1% BSA (Sigma). Reaction was stopped with the addition of 40 μL buffer containing 0.08 μg anti-cortisol monoclonal antibody (East Coast Biologies), 365 μg SPA PVT antibody-binding beads (Amersham Biosciences) and 175 μM carbenoxolone (Sigma).
[0322] Plates were incubated at room temperature overnight before being read on a Topcount (Packard). The point of 50% inhibition of 11/3-HSDl enzyme activity (IC50) was determined by computer-based curve fitting. Cell-based 11 3-HSD1 assay by SPA
[0323] This cell-based assay measures the conversion of 3H-cortisone to 3H-cortisol in a HEK-293 cell line stably overexpressing human recombinant 11/3-HSDl . HEK-293 cells were grown in DMEM/F12 supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, and plated onto poly- D-lysine-coated 96-well assay plates (Costar 3903), 100,000 cells per well in 50 μL assay media (phenol free DMEM/F12 (frivifrogen) + 0.2% BSA + 1% antibiotic-antimycotic solutions). The solution was incubated at 37 °C for 24 h, and the reaction was initiated by the addition of 25 μL of assay media containing compounds of desired concentration and 25 μL of assay media containing 40 nM of 3H-cortisone to each well. The reaction mixture was incubated at 37 °C for 90 min. and the reaction terminated by the addition of 25 μL of assay media containing 0.2 μg of anti-cortisol monoclonal antibody (East Coast Biologies), 500 μg SPA PVT antibody-binding beads (Amersham Biosciences) and 500 μM carbenoxolone (Sigma).
[0324] Plates were incubated at room temperature for at least 2 h before being read on Topcount (Packard). The point of 50% inhibition of 11/3-HSDl enzyme activity (IC50) was determined by computer-based curve fitting.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS;
1. A compound having the formula:
Figure imgf000096_0001
I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, stereoisomers, or prodrugs thereof, wherein: R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from -H, -halo, -OH, -CN, -NO2, - -Cs alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, - heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl and -aryl; and at least one of R1, R2 and R3 is other than -H; R4 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -Cι-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -C2-C8 hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl- (Cι-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(Cι-C6 alkyl), - C(O)R , -C(O)OR , -C(O)N(R)2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', - SO2R', -SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R' ; R5 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(Ci- C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , - C(O)OR , -C(O)N(R')2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', - SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R', or R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form an optionally substituted cycloalkane ring; R6 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1- C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R, - C(0)OR , -C(O)N(R')2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', - SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R'; R7 is selected from the group consisting of -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, amino and -CrC8 alkyl; Q is selected from the group consisting of -H, -halo, -CN, -N02, -Q-Cg alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, - heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(Cι-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , -C(0)OR , -C(O)N(R)2, -C(OR')R', -OR', -SR', - OC(0)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(0)R'; L1 is a direct bond, -C1-C7 alkylene- or -C1-C7 heteroalkylene-; L2 is a direct bond, -Cι-C7 alkylene- or -C1-C7 heteroalkylene-; wherein each occurrence of is R is independently -H, -CrC8 alkyl, -C -C8 alkenyl, - C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -alkoxyalkyl, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, - heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(CrC6 alkyl), - heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), or -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), or two R groups, when attached to the same nitrogen atom, can be combined with the nifrogen atom to which they are attached to form a heterocycle or heteroaryl group; and wherein when R1, R2 and R3 are each -F or -CH3, R4 is other than -H; and said compound is other than
Figure imgf000097_0001
wherein Ra is selected from 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-chlorophenyl and 4-bromophenyl and R is 4-fluorophenyl or 4-bromophenyl.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein Q is -aryl or -heteroaryl.
3. The compound of claim 2, wherein Q is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazinyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, furyl, thienyl, pyridyl, triazolyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazinyl, benzothiophenyl, benzothiazolyl, pxxrinyl, benzimidazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, carbazolyl, carbolinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, quinoxalinyl and quinazolinyl.
4. The compound of claim 2, wherein R1 is methyl or -OH.
5. The compound of claim 4, wherein R1, R2 and R3 are each methyl.
6. The compound of claim 4, wherein R1 is -OH and R2 and R3 are independently methyl or trifluoromethyl.
7. The compound of claim 2, wherein L is -Q-C7 alkylene and L is a direct bond.
8. The compound of claim 7, wherem L 1 is -CH2- and L is a direct bond.
9. The compound of claim 2, wherem L is -Cι.-C7 alkylene and L is -d- C alkylene.
10. The compound of claim 9, wherein L1 and L2 are each -CH2-.
11. The compound of claim 2, wherein R and R and the carbon atom to which they are attached combine to form a cycloalkane.
12. The compound of claim 11 , wherein R5 and R6 and the carbon atom to which they are attached combine to form a cyclopropane ring.
13. The compound of claim 11, wherein R5 and R6 and the carbon atom to which they are attached combine to form a cyclobutane ring.
14. The compound of claim 11, wherein R5 and R6 and the carbon atom to which they are attached combine to form a cyclop entane ring.
15. The compound ofclaim 1, wherein Q is -H, -Q- alkyl, -cycloalkyl, - heterocycle, -heteroaryl, -aryl, - OR', -C(O)OR' or -CON(R')2.
16. The compound of claim 15, wherein Q is -C(0)OR' or -CON(R')2.
17. The compound of claim 16, wherein Q is -COOH or -CONH2.
18. The compound of claim 16, wherein R1 is methyl or -OH.
19. The compound ofclaim 18, wherein R1, R2 and R3 are each methyl.
20. The compound ofclaim 18, wherein R1 is -OH and R2 and R3 are independently methyl or trifluoromethyl.
21. The compound ofclaim 16, wherein L is -CrC7 alkylene and L is a direct bond.
22. The compound of claim 21, wherein L1 is -CH2- and L2 is a direct bond.
23. The compound ofclaim 16, wherein L1 is -C1-C7 alkylene and L2 is - C C7 alkylene.
24. The compound ofclaim 23, wherein L1 and L2 are each -CH2-.
25. The compound of claim 16, wherein R5 and R6 and the carbon atom to which they are attached combine to form a (C3-C6)cycloalkane ring.
26. The compound ofclaim 25, wherein R and R and the carbon atom to which they are attached combine to form a cyclopropane ring.
27. The compound of claim 25, wherein R5 and R6 and the carbon atom to which they are attached combine to form a cyclobutane ring.
28. The compound of claim 25, wherein R5 and R6 and the carbon atom to which they are attached combine to form a cyclopentane ring.
29. The compound ofclaim 3, having the structure:
Figure imgf000100_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, stereoisomer, or prodrug thereof.
30. The compound ofclaim 17, having the structure:
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000101_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, stereoisomer, or prodrug thereof.
31. The compound of claim 1 , having the structure :
Figure imgf000101_0003
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000102_0002
Figure imgf000102_0003
32. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of any one of claims 1, 29, 30 or 31 and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle or carrier.
33. A pharmaceutical combination comprising the compound of any one of claims 1, 29, 30 or 31 and an additional therapeutic agent.
34. The pharmaceutical combination ofclaim 33, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is useful for freating a condition or disorder selected from the group consisting of diabetes, syndrome X, obesity, polycystic ovarian disease, an eating disorder, craniopharyngioma, Prader-Willi syndrome, Frohlich's syndrome, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, low HDL levels, high HDL levels, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia, Cushing's syndrome, hypertension, atherosclerosis, vascular restenosis, retinopathy, nephropathy, neurodegenerative disease, neuropathy, muscle wasting, cognitive disorders, dementia, depression, psoriasis, glaucoma, osteoporosis, a viral infection, an inflammatory disorder and an immune disorder.
35. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the pharmaceutical combination of claim 33 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle.
36. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutical combination of claim 34 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle.
37. A method of freating a condition or disorder selected from the group consisting of diabetes, syndrome X, obesity, polycystic ovarian disease, an eating disorder, craniopharyngioma, Prader-Willi syndrome, Frohlich's syndrome, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, low HDL levels, high HDL levels, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia, Cushing's syndrome, hypertension, atherosclerosis, vascular restenosis, retinopathy, nephropathy, neurodegenerative disease, neuropathy, muscle wasting, cognitive disorders, dementia, depression, psoriasis, glaucoma, osteoporosis, a viral infection, an inflammatory disorder and an immune disorder, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I):
Figure imgf000103_0001
I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, stereoisomers, or prodrugs thereof, wherein: R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from -H, -halo, -OH, -CN, -NO2, -Cι-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, - heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl and -aryl, and at least one of R1, R2 and R3 is other than -H; R4 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -C C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -C2-C8 hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl- (C C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-^rCe alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), - C(O)R , -C(O)OR , -C(O)N(R)2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R\ -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', - SO2R', -S02N(R')2, -N(R') , or -NR'C(O)R'; R5 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -Cι-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1- C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(CrC6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , - C(O)OR , -C(O)N(R')2, -C(OR')R', -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', - SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R', or R5 and R6, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, join to form an optionally substituted cycloalkane ring; R6 is -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -Cι-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, - alkoxy, - haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1- C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(Cι-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1 -C6 alkyl), -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , - C(O)OR , -C(O)N(R)2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', -OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', - SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R'; R7 is selected from the group consisting of -H, -halo, -CN, -N02, amino and -d-C8 alkyl; Q is selected from the group consisting of -H, -halo, -CN, -NO2, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, -C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocycloalkyl, - heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(d-C6 alkyl), -heteroaryl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -aryl-(C1-C6 alkyl),-C(O)R , -C(O)OR', -C(O)N(R)2, -C(OR')R , -OR', -SR', - OC(O)R', -C(O)N(R')2, -S(O)R', -SO2R', -SO2N(R')2, -N(R')2, or -NR'C(O)R'; L1 is a direct bond, -d-d alkylene- or -d-C heteroalkylene-; L2 is a direct bond, -d-C7 alkylene- or -d-d heteroalkylene-; wherein each occurrence of is R is independently -H, -d-C8 alkyl, -C2-C8 alkenyl, - C2-C8 alkynyl, -alkoxy, -alkoxyalkyl, -haloalkyl, -hydroxyalkyl, -cycloalkyl, - heterocycloalkyl, -heteroaryl, -aryl, -cycloalkyl-(C1-C6 alkyl), -heterocycle-(C1-C6 alkyl), - heteroaryl-(d-C6 alkyl), or -aryl-(Cι-C6 alkyl), or two R groups, when attached to the same nitrogen atom, can be combined with the nifrogen atom to which they are attached to form a heterocycle or heteroaryl group; and wherein when R1, R2 and R3 are each -F or -CH3, R4 is other than -H.
38. A method of treating a condition or disorder selected from the group consisting of diabetes, syndrome X, obesity, polycystic ovarian disease, an eating disorder, craniopharyngioma, Prader-Willi syndrome, Frohlich's syndrome, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, low HDL levels, high HDL levels, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia, Cushing's syndrome, hypertension, atherosclerosis, vascular restenosis, retinopathy, nephropathy, neurodegenerative disease, neuropathy, muscle wasting, cognitive disorders, dementia, depression, psoriasis, glaucoma, osteoporosis, a viral infection, an inflammatory disorder and an immune disorder, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound ofclaim 1.
39. The method of claim 38, wherein the condition or disorder is diabetes or obesity.
40. A method of freating a condition or disorder responsive to the modulation of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase, comprising admimstering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
41. The method of claim 40, wherein the hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase is 11/3-HSDl.
42. The method ofclaim 40, wherein the hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase is 11/3-HSD2.
43. The method of claim 40, wherein the hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase is 17/3-HSD3.
44. The method of claim 41, wherein the condition or disorder is selected from the group consisting of diabetes, syndrome X, obesity, polycystic ovarian disease, an eating disorder, craniopharyngioma, Prader-Willi syndrome, Frohlich's syndrome, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, low HDL levels, high HDL levels, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia, Cushing's syndrome, hypertension, atherosclerosis, vascular restenosis, retinopathy, nephropathy, neurodegenerative disease, neuropathy, muscle wasting, cognitive disorders, dementia, depression, psoriasis, glaucoma, osteoporosis, a viral infection, an inflammatory disorder and an immune disorder.
45. The method of claim 43, wherein the condition or disorder is an androgen- or estrogen-related disorder.
46. A method of freating a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase-mediated condition or disorder, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
47. The method of claim 46, wherein the hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase is 11/3-HSDl.
48. The method of claim 46, wherein the hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase is 11/3-HSD2.
49. The method of claim 46, wherein the hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase is 17/3-HSD3.
50. The method ofclaim 46, wherein the condition or disorder is selected from the group consisting of diabetes, syndrome X, obesity, polycystic ovarian disease, an eating disorder, craniopharyngioma, Prader-Willi syndrome, Frohlich's syndrome, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, low HDL levels, high HDL levels, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia, Cushing's syndrome, hypertension, atherosclerosis, vascular restenosis, retinopathy, nephropathy, neurodegenerative disease, neuropathy, muscle wasting, cognitive disorders, dementia, depression, psoriasis, glaucoma, osteoporosis, a viral infection, an inflammatory disorder and an immune disorder.
51. The method of claim 46, wherein the condition or disorder is an androgen- or estrogen-related disorder.
52. The method of any one of claims 38, 40 and 46, wherein the compound is administered orally, parenterally or topically.
53. The method of any one of claims 38, 40 and 46, wherein the compound is administered in combination with a second therapeutic agent.
54. The method of any one of claims 38, 40 and 46, wherein the patient is a human.
55. The method of claim 53, wherein the second therapeutic agent is useful for freating a condition or disorder selected from the group consisting of diabetes, syndrome X, obesity, polycystic ovarian disease, an eating disorder, craniopharyngioma, Prader-Willi syndrome, Frohlich's syndrome, hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, low HDL levels, high HDL levels, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, hyperinsulinemia, Cushing's syndrome, hypertension, atherosclerosis, vascular restenosis, retinopathy, nephropathy, neurodegenerative disease, neuropathy, muscle wasting, cognitive disorders, dementia, depression, psoriasis, glaucoma, osteoporosis, a viral infection, an inflammatory disorder and an immune disorder.
56. A method of modulating the function of a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase in a cell, comprising contacting a cell with a compound of claim 1.
57. A method of modulating a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase, comprising contacting a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase protein with a compound of claim 1.
58. The method ofclaim 56 or 57, wherein the compound inhibits a hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase.
59. A method of modulating the function of 11 /3-HSD 1 in a cell, comprising contacting a cell with a compound of claim 1.
60. A method of modulating 11/3-HSDl, comprising contacting an 11/3- HSD 1 protein with a compound of claim 1.
61. The method ofclaim 59 or 60, wherein the compound inhibits 11/3- HSDl.
62. A method of modulating the function of 11/3-HSD2 in a cell, comprising contacting a cell with a compound of claim 1.
63. A method of modulating 11/3-HSD2, comprising contacting an 11/3- HSD2 protein with a compound of claim 1.
64. The method of claim 62 or 63, wherein the compound inhibits 11/3- HSD2.
65. A method of modulating the function of 17/3-HSD3 in a cell, comprising contacting a cell with a compound of claim 1.
66. A method of modulating 17/3-HSD3, comprising contacting an 17/3- HSD3 protein with a compound of claim 1.
67. The method ofclaim 65 or 66, wherein the compound inhibits 17/3- HSD3.
68. The compound of claim 1, that is enantiomerically pure.
69. The compoxmd of claim 1, that is diasteromerically pure.
70. The compound ofclaim 1, that is in isolated and purified form.
PCT/US2004/042842 2003-12-22 2004-12-20 Aryl sulfonamide compounds and uses related thereto WO2005063247A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA002548309A CA2548309A1 (en) 2003-12-22 2004-12-20 Aryl sulfonamide compounds and uses related thereto
JP2006547244A JP2007515490A (en) 2003-12-22 2004-12-20 Arylsulfonamide compounds and related uses
AU2004308932A AU2004308932A1 (en) 2003-12-22 2004-12-20 Aryl sulfonamide compounds and uses related thereto
EP04814971A EP1703908A4 (en) 2003-12-22 2004-12-20 Aryl sulfonamide compounds and uses related thereto

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US53192403P 2003-12-22 2003-12-22
US60/531,924 2003-12-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2005063247A1 true WO2005063247A1 (en) 2005-07-14

Family

ID=34738718

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2004/042842 WO2005063247A1 (en) 2003-12-22 2004-12-20 Aryl sulfonamide compounds and uses related thereto

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (1) US7365075B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1703908A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2007515490A (en)
AR (1) AR047165A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2004308932A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2548309A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200533335A (en)
WO (1) WO2005063247A1 (en)

Cited By (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005110980A3 (en) * 2004-04-14 2006-02-23 Amgen Inc Aryl sulfones and uses related thereto
WO2006105127A2 (en) * 2005-03-31 2006-10-05 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors
WO2007070506A2 (en) * 2005-12-14 2007-06-21 Amgen Inc. Diaza heterocyclic sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
WO2007073935A1 (en) * 2005-12-29 2007-07-05 Lek Pharmaceuticals D.D. Heterocyclic compounds
WO2007128761A2 (en) 2006-05-04 2007-11-15 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Uses of dpp-iv inhibitors
EP1907357A1 (en) * 2005-07-22 2008-04-09 Amgen Inc. Aniline sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
EP1918285A1 (en) * 2006-11-03 2008-05-07 Merck Sante Diazepane-acetamide derivatives as selective 11beta-HSD1 inhibitors
WO2009021740A2 (en) 2007-08-15 2009-02-19 Sanofis-Aventis Substituted tetrahydronaphthalenes, process for the preparation thereof and the use thereof as medicaments
US7632838B2 (en) 2006-02-07 2009-12-15 Wyeth 11-beta HSD1 inhibitors
US7645773B2 (en) 2006-01-18 2010-01-12 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Thiazoles as inhibitors of 11β-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase
WO2010141550A3 (en) * 2009-06-04 2011-09-01 Wyeth Llc 11beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 (11-beta hsd1) inhibitors
WO2011107494A1 (en) 2010-03-03 2011-09-09 Sanofi Novel aromatic glycoside derivatives, medicaments containing said compounds, and the use thereof
WO2011157827A1 (en) 2010-06-18 2011-12-22 Sanofi Azolopyridin-3-one derivatives as inhibitors of lipases and phospholipases
WO2011161030A1 (en) 2010-06-21 2011-12-29 Sanofi Heterocyclic substituted methoxyphenyl derivatives having an oxo group, method for producing same, and use thereof as gpr40 receptor modulators
WO2012004270A1 (en) 2010-07-05 2012-01-12 Sanofi Spirocyclically substituted 1,3-propane dioxide derivatives, methods for the production thereof and use of the same as medicament
WO2012004269A1 (en) 2010-07-05 2012-01-12 Sanofi (2-aryloxy-acetylamino)-phenyl-propionic acid derivatives, method for producing same and use thereof as pharmaceuticals
WO2012010413A1 (en) 2010-07-05 2012-01-26 Sanofi Aryloxy-alkylene substituted hydroxyphenyl hexynoic acids, methods for the production thereof and use of the same as medicament
WO2012120054A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Di- and tri-substituted oxathiazine derivates, method for the production thereof, use thereof as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and use thereof
WO2012120055A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Di- and tri-substituted oxathiazine derivates, method for the production thereof, use thereof as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and use thereof
WO2012120052A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Oxathiazine derivatives substituted with carbocycles or heterocycles, method for producing same, drugs containing said compounds, and use thereof
WO2012120053A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Branched oxathiazine derivatives, method for the production thereof, use thereof as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and use thereof
WO2012120056A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Tetrasubstituted oxathiazine derivatives, method for producing them, their use as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and the use thereof
WO2013037390A1 (en) 2011-09-12 2013-03-21 Sanofi 6-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-3-styryl-1h-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-4-carboxylic acid amide derivatives as kinase inhibitors
WO2013045413A1 (en) 2011-09-27 2013-04-04 Sanofi 6-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-3-alkyl-1h-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-4-carboxylic acid amide derivatives as kinase inhibitors
US8524894B2 (en) 2009-06-04 2013-09-03 Laboratorios Salvat, S.A. Inhibitor compounds of 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1
WO2022066277A1 (en) * 2020-09-24 2022-03-31 Gongwin Biopharm Co., Ltd Method for reducing fat by administering benzenesulfonamide compositions
WO2023215205A1 (en) * 2022-05-06 2023-11-09 Merck Sharp & Dohme Llc Orexin receptor agonists

Families Citing this family (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7879840B2 (en) 2005-08-25 2011-02-01 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Agents for preventing and treating disorders involving modulation of the RyR receptors
US7718644B2 (en) 2004-01-22 2010-05-18 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Anti-arrhythmic and heart failure drugs that target the leak in the ryanodine receptor (RyR2) and uses thereof
US8022058B2 (en) 2000-05-10 2011-09-20 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Agents for preventing and treating disorders involving modulation of the RyR receptors
US8710045B2 (en) 2004-01-22 2014-04-29 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Agents for preventing and treating disorders involving modulation of the ryanodine receptors
US7704990B2 (en) 2005-08-25 2010-04-27 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Agents for preventing and treating disorders involving modulation of the RyR receptors
CN101417987B (en) * 2007-10-24 2011-07-13 山东轩竹医药科技有限公司 DPP-IV inhibitor with sulfonamide formyl piperazine structure
SG186885A1 (en) 2010-06-04 2013-02-28 Albany Molecular Res Inc Glycine transporter-1 inhibitors, methods of making them, and uses thereof
MX2021009515A (en) * 2019-02-08 2021-10-26 Sanofi Sa Biotechnological optimization of microorganisms for the 1,2-dehydrogenation of steroids.
CN114605282B (en) * 2022-03-22 2024-10-08 江苏阿尔法集团盛基药业(宿迁)有限公司 Preparation method of Montelukast sodium side chain intermediate
CN114605283A (en) * 2022-03-22 2022-06-10 宿迁盛基医药科技有限公司 Method for efficiently preparing montelukast sodium side chain intermediate
WO2024107615A1 (en) * 2022-11-17 2024-05-23 Merck Sharp & Dohme Llc Orexin receptor agonists

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003033484A1 (en) * 2001-10-11 2003-04-24 Bayer Healthcare Ag Substituted piperazine cyclohexane carboxilic acid amides and the use thereof

Family Cites Families (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS63101849A (en) * 1986-10-17 1988-05-06 Konica Corp Silver halide photographic sensitive material
US5656644A (en) * 1994-07-20 1997-08-12 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Pyridyl imidazoles
IL104369A0 (en) * 1992-01-13 1993-05-13 Smithkline Beecham Corp Novel compounds and compositions
WO2001002371A1 (en) 1999-03-05 2001-01-11 Nippon Soda Co., Ltd. Optically active piperazine compounds, intermediates for the preparation of the same and processes for the preparation of both
DE19838300A1 (en) * 1998-08-24 2000-03-02 Bayer Ag 9-dialkylaminopurinone derivatives
DE19838705A1 (en) * 1998-08-26 2000-03-02 Bayer Ag New dihydro- (1,2,3) -triazolo- [4,5-d] pyrimidin-7-ones
WO2001024786A1 (en) * 1999-05-13 2001-04-12 Shionogi & Co., Ltd. Preventive or therapeutic drugs for diabetes
DE10000739A1 (en) * 2000-01-11 2001-07-12 Merck Patent Gmbh New piperidine and piperazine derivatives which are antagonists of certain serotonin receptors, are useful in treatment of, e.g. eating disorders, stroke, anxiety or Parkinson's disease
SE0001899D0 (en) 2000-05-22 2000-05-22 Pharmacia & Upjohn Ab New compounds
EP1436281B1 (en) * 2001-10-17 2010-06-16 Schering Corporation Piperidine- and piperazineacetamides as 17beta hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 3 inhibitors for the treatment of androgen dependent diseases
CN1633428A (en) 2001-11-22 2005-06-29 比奥维特罗姆股份公司 Inhibitors of 11-beta-hydroxy steroid dehydrogenase type 1

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003033484A1 (en) * 2001-10-11 2003-04-24 Bayer Healthcare Ag Substituted piperazine cyclohexane carboxilic acid amides and the use thereof

Cited By (41)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005110980A3 (en) * 2004-04-14 2006-02-23 Amgen Inc Aryl sulfones and uses related thereto
US7402704B2 (en) 2004-04-14 2008-07-22 Amgen Inc. Arylsulfones and uses related thereto
US7754890B2 (en) 2004-04-14 2010-07-13 Amgen Inc. Arylsulfones and uses related thereto
WO2006105127A2 (en) * 2005-03-31 2006-10-05 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors
WO2006105127A3 (en) * 2005-03-31 2007-03-22 Takeda San Diego Inc Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors
US7759339B2 (en) 2005-03-31 2010-07-20 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors
EP1907357A1 (en) * 2005-07-22 2008-04-09 Amgen Inc. Aniline sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
WO2007070506A2 (en) * 2005-12-14 2007-06-21 Amgen Inc. Diaza heterocyclic sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
WO2007070506A3 (en) * 2005-12-14 2007-12-13 Amgen Inc Diaza heterocyclic sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
US7825122B2 (en) 2005-12-14 2010-11-02 Amgen Inc. Diaza heterocyclic sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
WO2007073935A1 (en) * 2005-12-29 2007-07-05 Lek Pharmaceuticals D.D. Heterocyclic compounds
US7645773B2 (en) 2006-01-18 2010-01-12 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Thiazoles as inhibitors of 11β-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase
US7632838B2 (en) 2006-02-07 2009-12-15 Wyeth 11-beta HSD1 inhibitors
EP2351568A2 (en) 2006-05-04 2011-08-03 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH Uses of dpp-iv inhibitors
WO2007128761A2 (en) 2006-05-04 2007-11-15 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Uses of dpp-iv inhibitors
US8242107B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2012-08-14 Merck Patent Gesellschaft Mit Beschrankter Haftung Diazepane-acetamide derivatives as selective 11β-HSD1 inhibitors
JP2010508312A (en) * 2006-11-03 2010-03-18 メルク パテント ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Diazepane-acetamide derivatives as selective 11β-HSD1 inhibitors
WO2008052638A1 (en) * 2006-11-03 2008-05-08 Merk Patent Gmbh DIAZEPANE-ACETAMIDE DERIVATIVES AS SELECTIVE 11β-HSD1 INHIBITORS
EP1918285A1 (en) * 2006-11-03 2008-05-07 Merck Sante Diazepane-acetamide derivatives as selective 11beta-HSD1 inhibitors
US8586577B2 (en) 2006-11-03 2013-11-19 Merck Patent Gmbh Diazepane acetamide derivatives as selective 11B-HSD1 inhibitors
WO2009021740A2 (en) 2007-08-15 2009-02-19 Sanofis-Aventis Substituted tetrahydronaphthalenes, process for the preparation thereof and the use thereof as medicaments
WO2010141550A3 (en) * 2009-06-04 2011-09-01 Wyeth Llc 11beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 (11-beta hsd1) inhibitors
US8822452B2 (en) 2009-06-04 2014-09-02 Laboratorios Salvat, S.A. Inhibitor compounds of 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1
US8524894B2 (en) 2009-06-04 2013-09-03 Laboratorios Salvat, S.A. Inhibitor compounds of 11-beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1
WO2011107494A1 (en) 2010-03-03 2011-09-09 Sanofi Novel aromatic glycoside derivatives, medicaments containing said compounds, and the use thereof
WO2011157827A1 (en) 2010-06-18 2011-12-22 Sanofi Azolopyridin-3-one derivatives as inhibitors of lipases and phospholipases
WO2011161030A1 (en) 2010-06-21 2011-12-29 Sanofi Heterocyclic substituted methoxyphenyl derivatives having an oxo group, method for producing same, and use thereof as gpr40 receptor modulators
WO2012004269A1 (en) 2010-07-05 2012-01-12 Sanofi (2-aryloxy-acetylamino)-phenyl-propionic acid derivatives, method for producing same and use thereof as pharmaceuticals
WO2012010413A1 (en) 2010-07-05 2012-01-26 Sanofi Aryloxy-alkylene substituted hydroxyphenyl hexynoic acids, methods for the production thereof and use of the same as medicament
WO2012004270A1 (en) 2010-07-05 2012-01-12 Sanofi Spirocyclically substituted 1,3-propane dioxide derivatives, methods for the production thereof and use of the same as medicament
WO2012120054A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Di- and tri-substituted oxathiazine derivates, method for the production thereof, use thereof as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and use thereof
WO2012120055A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Di- and tri-substituted oxathiazine derivates, method for the production thereof, use thereof as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and use thereof
WO2012120052A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Oxathiazine derivatives substituted with carbocycles or heterocycles, method for producing same, drugs containing said compounds, and use thereof
WO2012120053A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Branched oxathiazine derivatives, method for the production thereof, use thereof as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and use thereof
WO2012120056A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Tetrasubstituted oxathiazine derivatives, method for producing them, their use as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and the use thereof
WO2013037390A1 (en) 2011-09-12 2013-03-21 Sanofi 6-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-3-styryl-1h-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-4-carboxylic acid amide derivatives as kinase inhibitors
WO2013045413A1 (en) 2011-09-27 2013-04-04 Sanofi 6-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-3-alkyl-1h-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-4-carboxylic acid amide derivatives as kinase inhibitors
WO2022066277A1 (en) * 2020-09-24 2022-03-31 Gongwin Biopharm Co., Ltd Method for reducing fat by administering benzenesulfonamide compositions
TWI788000B (en) * 2020-09-24 2022-12-21 共信醫藥科技股份有限公司 Use of benzenesulfonamide compositions in reducing fat
US11752160B2 (en) 2020-09-24 2023-09-12 Gongwin Biopharm Co., Ltd Method for reducing fat by administering benzenesulfonamide compositions
WO2023215205A1 (en) * 2022-05-06 2023-11-09 Merck Sharp & Dohme Llc Orexin receptor agonists

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20050277649A1 (en) 2005-12-15
AU2004308932A1 (en) 2005-07-14
EP1703908A4 (en) 2009-07-08
TW200533335A (en) 2005-10-16
US7365075B2 (en) 2008-04-29
AR047165A1 (en) 2006-01-11
CA2548309A1 (en) 2005-07-14
JP2007515490A (en) 2007-06-14
EP1703908A1 (en) 2006-09-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7365075B2 (en) Aryl sulfonamide compounds and uses related thereto
US7825122B2 (en) Diaza heterocyclic sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
US7524848B2 (en) Diaza heterocyclic amide compounds and their uses
EP2029540B1 (en) Benzamide derivatives and uses related thereto
EP1904435B1 (en) Benzamide derivatives and uses related thereto
EP2044004B1 (en) Benzamide derivatives as modulators of 11beta-hsd1 for treating diabetes and obesity
EP1753421B1 (en) Arylsulfonamides and uses as hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase
EP1735275B1 (en) Aryl sulfones and uses related thereto
US8765788B2 (en) Tricyclic inhibitors of hydroxysteroid dehydrogenases
US8076376B2 (en) Aniline sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
MX2008007725A (en) Diaza heterocyclic sulfonamide derivatives and their uses

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2548309

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/2006/007141

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2006547244

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004308932

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004814971

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2004308932

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20041220

Kind code of ref document: A

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2004308932

Country of ref document: AU

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2004814971

Country of ref document: EP